manga studio user manual
TRANSCRIPT
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 1/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 2/4152
Layer File .................................................................................................41
Image File ................................................................................................42
Photohop file (EX only) ...........................................................................46
TWAIN .....................................................................................................47
Continuou scan (EX only) ........................................................................48
Image File ................................................................................................50
save Page Template ................................................................................55
save material (EX only) ...........................................................................56
Page etting ...........................................................................................62
Print setup ...............................................................................................62
Printing ....................................................................................................63
Rater Drawing ........................................................................................66
Vector Drawing (EX only) ..........................................................................66
Anti-Aliaed Drawing/Diplay(EX only) ......................................................67
showing the Center Line (EX only) ............................................................67
Drawing Color[Monochrome](Black/White/Tranparent).............................68
Drawing Color [Gray] ................................................................................70
Drawing Color [Color]...............................................................................73
Tool Uage ...............................................................................................76
Pen Tool ...................................................................................................78
In/Out/Correction ......................................................................................80
Note .......................................................................................................80
Bruh Control ...........................................................................................81
Eraer Tool ...............................................................................................82
Magic Marker Marker Tool ........................................................................84
Pencil Tool ................................................................................................86
Calligraphy Pen (EX only) ..........................................................................88
Pattern Bruh Tool ....................................................................................90
Eyedropper Tool (EX only) .........................................................................93Fill Tool ....................................................................................................94
Fill Cloed Area Tool (EX only) ...................................................................96
Line Tool ..................................................................................................98
Curve Tool ................................................................................................98
Polyline Tool ...........................................................................................100
Rectangle, Ellipe, and Polygon Tool.......................................................102
Ruler Baic............................................................................................106Object selector Tool ................................................................................112
Ruler Operation ....................................................................................113
Step: 03 Shortcut preferences (For EX only)
Step: 02 Preferences
Step: 04 Custom Tool Settings (For EX only)
Step: 02 Page operation
Step: 03 Page
Step: 04 Import
Chapter: 01
Chapter 1 - Getting Started
Step: 01 Startup and shutdown
Chapter: 02
Chapter 2 - Files
Step: 01 File Operations
Step: 05 Export
Step: 06 Save
Step: 07 Printing
Step: 02 Drawing Color
Step: 03 Drawing
Chapter: 03
Chapter 3 - Drawing
Step: 01 Drawing Format
Chapter: 04
Chapter 4 - Rulers
Step: 01 Rulers
Before reading thi manual .........................................................................6
startup Manga studio. ...............................................................................8
shutdown Manga studio. ..........................................................................8
Initialization startup. .................................................................................9
story ........................................................................................................10
Page ........................................................................................................10
Page: Curor ............................................................................................11
Page: Magnification Angle ........................................................................12
Page: Ruler...............................................................................................12
Page: Panel setting .................................................................................13
Layer ........................................................................................................13
Tool .........................................................................................................14
Printing scanning .....................................................................................14
Memory ...................................................................................................15
Tablet.......................................................................................................15
Folder Path ...............................................................................................16
Option ....................................................................................................16
Export & Import........................................................................................17
shortcut preference baic ........................................................................18
Cutom tool preference baic ..................................................................19
Regarding File Type .................................................................................22
Regarding file compatibility ......................................................................23
Create New File .......................................................................................24
saving a File .............................................................................................30
Open File ................................................................................................32
Open Page and Cloe Page .......................................................................33
To Next Page and To Previou Page ...........................................................33
Clear Page and Delete Page ......................................................................34
Inert Page ...............................................................................................34
Copy Page................................................................................................35
Open two page pread, open ingle page (EX only) ...................................36
Page diplay .............................................................................................36
Change Title Information .......................................................................... 38
Modify Binding Poition/ start Page Changing .....................................................38
Change Page Format Guide ......................................................................39
Page File ..................................................................................................40
Multi-layer file ........................................................................................41
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 3/4153
Bezier Curve Ruler Baic........................................................................115
Create Path Tool (EX only) ......................................................................116
Perpective Ruler (EX only)......................................................................121
Radial Line Ruler (EX only) ....................................................................124
Radial Curve Ruler (EX only) ...................................................................125
Parallel Line Ruler (EX only) ...................................................................126Concentric Circle Ruler (EX only) .............................................................127
symmetry Ruler (EX only) ........................................................................128
symmetry Ruler baic (EX only)..............................................................128
Panel Ruler Baic ..................................................................................131
Panel Ruler Cutter Tool ...........................................................................136
Ruler Editing ..........................................................................................137
Align Ruler ...........................................................................................143
Layer Baic ...........................................................................................146
Layer Type.............................................................................................147
Layer select tool .....................................................................................153
Layer Move Tool .....................................................................................154Creating New Layer ..............................................................................155
selecting Layer......................................................................................155
selecting Multiple Layer ........................................................................155
Layer Duplication ...................................................................................156
Deleting a Layer .....................................................................................156
Converting Layer to a Folder .................................................................157
Layer Type Change .................................................................................158
Merging Layer ......................................................................................161
show/Hide Layer ....................................................................................162
Changing the Order of Layer .................................................................162Diplaying the Layer Diviion ..................................................................163
Changing the Layer Palette Color ............................................................163
Panel Folder Baic .................................................................................164
Panel Creation Tool ................................................................................166
selection Baic ......................................................................................168
Rectangle selection Tool .........................................................................170
Ellipe selection Tool ..............................................................................170
Lao selection Tool................................................................................171
Polyline selection Tool ............................................................................171
Magic Marker Wand Tool ........................................................................173
Type of Tool Option .............................................................................174
Create a selection ..................................................................................180
Edit a selection ......................................................................................183
selection Launcher .................................................................................186
selection Layer Baic .............................................................................187
selection Layer Operation .......................................................................188Quick Mak (EX only) .............................................................................191
Quick select (EX) ....................................................................................192
select a Vector Line ................................................................................193
Tone Baic ............................................................................................196Gradation Tool (EX only) .........................................................................200
Tone Editing ...........................................................................................202
searching Tone .....................................................................................210
Creating Original Tone ..........................................................................210
Tone setting .........................................................................................214
Managing Tone .....................................................................................217
Computone Baic ................................................................................218
Decription of Computone Function .....................................................220
Key Combination ....................................................................................223
Cutting ..................................................................................................226
Copying .................................................................................................226
Copying to another Application ..............................................................227
Pating ...................................................................................................228
Pating with Tranparent White ...............................................................228
Pating with Opaque Color (32-Bit Only) .................................................229
Line-Joining Tool ....................................................................................230
Line Level Tool (EX only) .........................................................................232
Width Changing Tool (EX only) ...............................................................233
Edit Lining Tool (EX only) ........................................................................234
Baic of Moving and Tranforming .........................................................235
Type of Moving and Tranformation .......................................................237
Ditortion Tool (EX only) .........................................................................239
speed Line Tool (EX only) ......................................................................241
Dut Filtering Tool (EX only) ....................................................................242
Blurring Tool (EX only) ............................................................................243
Step: 02 Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only)
Step: 03 Special Ruler (EX only)
Step: 04 Panel Ruler
Step: 05 Edit・Align Rulers
Step: 02 Using Layers
Step: 03 Displaying Layers
Step: 04 Panel Folder
Chapter: 05
Chapter 5 - Layers
Step: 01 Layers
Chapter: 06
Chapter 6 - Selection
Step: 01 Selection
Step: 02 Convert a Selection to a Layer
Step: 03 Select a Vector Line (EX only)
Step: 02 Computones (EX only)
Step: 03 Move and Transform
Step: 04 Retouching
Chapter: 07
Chapter 7 - Tone
Step: 01 Manga Studio Screen Tones
Chapter: 08
Chapter 8 - Editing
Step: 01 Cut and Paste
Step: 02 Edit Lines
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 4/4154
stamping Tool (EX only) ..........................................................................244
Color Mixing Tool (EX only) .....................................................................246
Dodging Tool (EX only) ...........................................................................247
Burning Tool (EX only) ............................................................................248
Revere Layer .........................................................................................249
Making Layer (such a Panel Folder) ......................................................250
Filter .....................................................................................................254
Vanihing Point .....................................................................................256
Focu Line.............................................................................................257
speed Line ............................................................................................258
Cloud Pattern (EX only) ..........................................................................260
Lightning Bolt (EX only) ..........................................................................260
Polar Coordinate (EX only) ....................................................................262
Wave (EX only) .......................................................................................263
Waveform (EX only) ..............................................................................264
spiral (EX only) .......................................................................................265
Zigzag (EX only) .....................................................................................265
Brightne and Contrast (EX only) ..................................................................................266
Tone Curve (EX only) ..............................................................................267Level Adjutment (EX only) .....................................................................268
Hue/saturation/Value (EX only) ...............................................................269
Bitmap (EX only) ....................................................................................270
Dut Filter (EX only) ................................................................................271
Edit Line (EX only) ..................................................................................272
Change Width (EX only) ..........................................................................273
Moaic (EX only) ....................................................................................274sharpen (EX only) / .................................................................................274
sharpen (Heavy)(EX only)........................................................................274
Poterization (EX only) ............................................................................275
Invert Tone (EX only)...............................................................................275
Blur (EX only) .........................................................................................276
Blur (Heavy) (EX only) .............................................................................276
Gauian Blur (EX only) ..........................................................................276
Radial Blur (EX only) ...............................................................................277
Motion Blur (EX only) .............................................................................278
sparkle (EX only) ....................................................................................279
soft Focu (EX only) ................................................................................280
Pattern (EX only) ...................................................................................281
Random Grid Pattern (EX only) ...............................................................282
Rain (EX only) ........................................................................................283
2D Rotate (EX only) ................................................................................284
Pinch (EX only) .......................................................................................285
speed Rotation (EX only) ........................................................................286
Ditorted Focu Line (EX only) ...............................................................287
Ditorted speed Line (EX only)...............................................................288spherical (EX only) .................................................................................289
Fiheye Len (EX only) ............................................................................290
2DLT Rendering Function ........................................................................292
2DLT setting ...........................................................................................295
Preproceing Filter ................................................................................299
Move and Tranform ...............................................................................299
Baic of the 3Dsketching Function .........................................................300
supported 3D data .................................................................................302
3D Frame Tool ........................................................................................304
3D selection Tool....................................................................................305
Manipulating 3D Object ........................................................................306
Camera Operation .................................................................................310
Diplay Adjutment .................................................................................312
3D space Ruler .....................................................................................316
Baic of 3D Human model ...................................................................318
saving Poe and scene ........................................................................320
3DLT Rendering Function Baic ..............................................................322
3DLT setting .........................................................................................324
Four View .............................................................................................327
Text function baic ................................................................................330
Text tool .................................................................................................330Text preference .....................................................................................332
Ruby etting (EX only) ...........................................................................333
style etting (EX only) ...........................................................................336
Import text (EX only) ..............................................................................339
Export text (EX only) ...............................................................................340
story editor (EX only) ..............................................................................341
Balloon function baic ...........................................................................346
Create balloon (EX only) .......................................................................347
Step: 05 Black-White Reversal and Masking
Step: 02 Rendering Filters
Step: 03 Transform Filters
Step: 04 Image Adjustment Filters (EX only)
Step: 05 Line Adjustment Filters (EX only)
Step: 06 Effect Filters (EX only)
Chapter: 09
Chapter 9 - Filters
Step: 01 Filters
Step: 07 Blur Filters (EX only)
Step: 08 Drawing (Comic Filters Vol. 1) (EX only)
Chapter: 11
Chapter 11 - Text and Word Balloons
Step: 01 Text
Chapter: 10
Chapter 10 - Rendering
Step: 01 2DLT (EX only)
Step: 09 Distort (EX only)
Step: 02 3D Sketching (EX only)
Step: 03 3DLT (EX only)
Step: 02 Word Balloons
Chapter: 12
Chapter 12 - Display and Windows
Step: 01 Screen Display
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 5/4155
screen Diplay Baic..............................................................................354
Hand Tool ..............................................................................................354
Rotate Tool ............................................................................................355
Bug Glae Tool ....................................................................................356
screen Rotation ......................................................................................357
screen Inverion .....................................................................................357
Actual Pixel ..........................................................................................358
show All ................................................................................................358
Print size................................................................................................359
show Tranparent Area ...........................................................................359
New Window .........................................................................................360
show Meaurement scale ......................................................................361
show Print Guide and Baic Frame ..........................................................361
show Guide ...........................................................................................362
show Grid ..............................................................................................362
show story and Author Info ....................................................................363
show Page Number ................................................................................363
Diplay Pagination ..................................................................................363
Material baic .....................................................................................366
External browing ..................................................................................367
Character baic (EX only) ......................................................................368
Undoing command (Undo) ....................................................................370Redo command (Redo) ...........................................................................370
Hitory function ......................................................................................371
Action baic ........................................................................................372
File Menu ...............................................................................................378Edit Menu ..............................................................................................379
story Menu ............................................................................................380
View Menu ............................................................................................381
selection Menu ......................................................................................382
Layer Menu ..........................................................................................383
Ruler Menu ............................................................................................384
Filter Menu ............................................................................................385
Window Menu .......................................................................................386
Help Menu .............................................................................................387
Edit Window ..........................................................................................388
Tool Bar .................................................................................................389
Tool Palette ..........................................................................................390
Tool Option Palette ..............................................................................391
Layer Palette .........................................................................................392
Navigator Palette ...................................................................................393
Material Palette ....................................................................................394
Propertie Palette ...................................................................................395
Hitory Palette ........................................................................................395
Color Palette ..........................................................................................396
Cutomize Tool Palette (EX only) ...........................................................396
Action Palette (EX only) ..........................................................................396
Beginner' Aitant ...............................................................................397
Step: 02 Show Guidelines
Step: 03 Show Information
Step: 03 Actions (EX only)
Chapter: 13
Chapter 13 - Other
Step: 01 Materials (For EX only)
Chapter: 14
Chapter 14 - Features Reference
Step: 01 Menus
Chapter: 15
Chapter 15 - Appendix
Step: 01 Troubleshooting
Step: 02 Glossary
Step: 02 Undoing commands
Step: 02 Windows Palette
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 6/4156
Before reading this manual
■Getting StartedThis manual assumes the reader understands the following basic operations:
・PC startup and shutdown process
・Basic mouse operations (click, double click, drag, etc)
・Basic File Operations (creating folders, moving files, copying, deleting, etc)
・Basic PC knowledge (hard disc, monitor, sort)
・Basic computer graphics and printing knowledge
For further information on these items, refer to the manuals which came with your computer, or a book on basic computer functions.
■ About「Product Lineup」
Manga Studio Ver. 4. 0 has two versions: Debut and EX, both of which are covered in this manual. The limitations of each version are indicated as follows:
・Debut
Indicates the functionalities included in Manga Studio Debut.
・EX
Indicates the functionalities included in Manga Studio EX.
■ About 「Point」
At the end of certain paragraphs, there are further explanations regarding the operation. They are labeled with the following title:
・Explanation
Convenient things to know or an explanation to increase understanding.
・Applied Operations
Introduction of applied operations to increase Manga studio use and increase efficiency when working.
・Note
These note areas in which mistakes easily occur or where added care need be taken.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 7/415
第2
章
第1 章
第 3 章
第4 章
第 5 章
Getting Started
Chapter 1
This chapter is about starting up and shutting down Manga Studio and customizing for advanced users.
Step: 01 startup and shutdown 008
Step: 02 Preference 010
Step: 03 shortcut Preference (For EX only) 019
C h a p t e r 1
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d
Step: 04 Cutom Tool setting(For EX only) 020
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 8/415
Manga Studio
8
:
Manga Studio
Startup and shutdown01
Startup Manga Studio. 1. Select Shutdown Option
From the [File] menu, elect [Exit].
2. Shutdown Will be Complete.
The Manga studio application will hutdown.
1. Open Start Menu
select Manga studio by electing from the Window [start] Menu [All Program]
Shutdown Manga Studio.
・[standard Interface] i the tandard interface which previou uer will be ued to.
・[Beginner' aitant] i an interface for beginner where all neceary tool for
ketching, inerting pen, etc are viible one pace.
Explanation
4. Complete startup
After electing the UI with the [Select Default UI Mode] prompt box, Manga
studio will tart.
3. Select User Interface (On first startup only)
After intallation a [select Default UI Mode] prompt box will be diplayed,
where you can elect your preferred UI mode for Manga studio tart up.
1 select either the [Ue The standard Interface] or [Ue The Beginner’ Aitant] option.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3
1
2. Select Start Menu (Initial startup only)
On the initial tartup only, a [Intalling Material] prompt box will be diplayed.
Follow the intruction to intall the material.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 9/415
UserGuide
9
C h a p t e r
1
G e t t i n g S t a r
t e d
When there i a problem with Manga studio, initialize tartup and return Manga
studio to original etting.
Initialization Startup.
The item elected from the [Initialize tartup] prompt box will be returned pot-
intallation tatu, and have all preference deleted. Alo note that all created item
will be deleted.
NOTE
3. Select items to be deleted from the [Initialization Start-up] promptbox. These selections will have their current preferences reset to the
time of installation. Then click the [OK] button.
2. Confirmation prompt box will be displayed
When the confirmation prompt box i diplayed, click [Ye].
1. Open Start Menu
From the Window [start] Menu [All Program] select Manga Studios while
holding down the [Shift] key.
4. Initialization Startup Complete
The item elected in the [Initialization start-up] dialog will be returned to theoriginal etting and the Manga studio application will tartup.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 10/415
Manga Studio
10
StoryConfigure the preference for the [story] tab from the [Preference] window.
Operation At Startup
Configure tartup preference for the [story] file.
・[Create New Story]
Create a new [story] file upon tartup.
・[New Story Settings...]
Configure preference for the newly created [story] file.
・[Open Story That Was Last Opened] Open the lat file that wa in ue.
・[Conduct No Operation]
Do not create a [story] file when tarting up.
Page Thumbnail Quality
set the reolution and image quality of thumbnail diplayed on the [Edit]
window’ [story] tab.
・[Resolution]
select whether to diplay thumbnail on the [Edit] window’ [story] tab in
[standard] or [High] reolution.
・[View]
select whether to diplay thumbnail on the [Edit] window’ [story] tab in
[standard] or [High] quality.
Options
Configure other [story] file preference.
・[Auto Data Save When Changing Pages]
When electing [Previou page] or [Next page] from the [story] menu, data will
automatically be aved.
・[Auto Create New Page When Changing Pages]
When electing [Next page] from the [Page File] menu, if there i no [Next
page] a new one will be created.
・[Always Open in New Window When Opening With Double Click]
The page will be diplayed in a new window upon double clicking.
PageConfigure the diplay or key input preference from the [File] tab.
Display
Configure the preference for the [Preference] window [Page] tab.
・[View Quality]
select from [standard], [High] or [Maximum] for the Page diplay quality.
・[Show Transparent Areas In Checkered Pattern]
When thi option i elected, the tranparent area will be diplayed with
a checkered pattern for viibility convenience.・[Transparent Area Display Color]
Thi option allow the uer to diplay the tranparent area in a elected color.
・[Preview During Move and Transform]
Configure the diplay condition of the image which i temporarily hown when
doing the [Move and modify] or [Tone ditortion] from the [Edit] menu.
・[Transformation Guide Display Color]
Change the color of the guideline hown when you elect a [Move and
Tranform] operation from the [Edit] menu.
・[Transformation Guide Width]
Change the width of the guideline hown when you elect a [Move and
Tranform] operation from the [Edit] menu.
・[Change Vector Width After Transformation] (EX only)
Change the vector line width when carrying out [Move and modify].
・ [Link New Window With Opened Separate Window Display Range]
From the [Window] menu, link the diplay area of the multiple [Edit] window
[Page File] tab which are diplayed by the [New window] command.
・[Quick Mask Range Display Color] (EX only)
Configure the diplay color of the Quick Mak area.
:
Manga Studio
Preferences02
Configure preferences for Title, Page, Layer, Tool, Printing Scanning, Memory, etc.
The [Preference] window i diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].
Key Input
Configure the amount of movement when uing the direction key on the
keyboard with the [Layer Move] tool.
・[Vertical Displacement]
Configure the amount of vertical movement when the up/down key are preed.
・[Horizontal Displacement]
Configure the amount of horizontal movement when the left/right key are preed.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 11/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 12/415
Manga Studio
12
Page: Magnification Angle
Thi et the diplay magnification and diplay angle of the page.
Display Scale
Thi et the diplay cale of the page.
・Display Magnification List
select the diplay magnification from a lit of poible etting.
・Display Magnification Display Box
Manually enter the preferred magnification etting.
・[Add]
Add the manually inputted preferred etting to the cale diplay lit.
・[Change] Change the preference to one of the option from the diplay cale lit.
・[Delete]
Delete a diplay etting from the cale diplay lit.
・[Reset All]
Reet the cale diplay lit to it default etting.
Display Angle
Thi et the diplay angle of the page.
・[Step value]
set the rotational angle when clicking the [set rotation angle] button from the
[Page File] or [Panel] tab from the [Edit] window.
Print Size Display
Thi et the print ize of the page.
・[Print Size Viewing Scale]
From the [Preference] window, click the [Print size] button, or the [Print size]
command from the [Window] menu.
Page: Ruler
Configure preference for ruler.
Display
Configure preference for grid diplay.
・[Show Graduations On Straight Line Rulers]
Diplay a grid on [Horizontal Ruler].
・[Show Guide Lines When Snapping To Parallel Lines Or Speed Lines]
(EX only)
When napping to [Parallel or Radial Line rule], a guide line will be diplayed
which how in which direction to lay the line.
・[Move The Parallel Lines Ruler Display Position To Edge Of View](EX only)
Diplay [Parallel line ruler] on edge of [Edit] window [Page File] tab.
・[Sub Ruler Default Color]
Configure the default diplay color for the ub rule.
Key Input
Configure preference for keyboard control of the ruler.
・[Vertical Displacement]
Configure the amount of vertical ruler movement by keyboard input.
・[Horizontal Displacement]
Configure the amount of horizontal ruler movement by keyboard input.
・[Rotation Amount]
Configure the amount of ruler rotation by keyboard input.
・[Scale]
Configure the Zoom in/Zoom out cale by keyboard input.
The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 13/415
UserGuide
13
C h a p t e r
1
G e t t i n g S t a r
t e d
Page: Panel Settings
Border Panel preference configuration.
Panel Settings
Configure preference for Panel.
・[Panel Preview Display Color]
set the diplay color for the [Panel Ruler].
・[Show Opacity]
Configure etting for opacity of the [Panel Ruler] diplay.
・[Panel Width]
Configure the [Panel Ruler] border width.
Side Interval
Configure preference for Panel ruler interval.
・[Horizontal Interval]
Configure preference for the [Horizontal Interval] value from the [Panel Ruler
Cutter Option] palette.
・[Vertical Interval]
Configure preference for the [Vertical Interval] from the [Panel Ruler Cutter
Option] palette.
Frame Area
Configure preference for Panel area.
・[Margin of Frame Area]
Configure the margin outide the panel border when creating the [Panel
Folder] from the [Panel Frame Ruler Layer].
LayerConfigure preference for [Layer] pallete.
Default Layer Properties
Configure preference for the default layer.
・[Layer Type]
select the default layer option. The preference of the elected layer will be
diplayed below.
・[Default Options] button
Modify the default option of the layer elected in [Layer Type].
・[Prioritize Color Model As Page/Story Standard Color Mode]
From the [Layer] menu, when creating a Rater layer Vector layer from the
[New Layer] (EX only),the page baic color repreentation will be the layer
[Repreentation color].
When turned off, the etting in the preference will be prioritized.
・[Show Properties Palette By Double Clicking Layer ]
When double clicking the Layer Icon, the [Property] palette will be diplayed.
・[Show New Layer Menu By Clicking Left Button]
When you left click the [Category] column on the[Layer] palette, the New Layer
Menu will be diplayed. When turned off, it will be diplayed by right click.
・[Switch Editing Subject Using New Tone/New Text Layer]
When a new [Tone Layer] or [Text Layer] is created, the new object will be a
new layer.
Thumbnail Size
select the ize of the thumbnail to be diplayed above the [Layer] palette.
The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preferences] window will be displayed by selecting、[File] - [Preferences].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 14/415
Manga Studio
14
ToolConfigure preference for [Tool] pallete.
Arrange Tool Palette
Configure preference for [Tool] pallete layout.
・[Ver.4 Style]
Diplay the [Tool] palette in the Ver. 4. 0 layout. Change take effect after
application retart.
・[Classic Style]
Diplay the [Tool] pallette in the Ver. 3. 0 layout.
Tool OperationConfigure preference for [Tool] pallete operation.
・[Set Auto Scroll]
scroll the window to follow the movement of the curor when it move out of
the [Edit] window boundarie.
・[Show All by Double Clicking With The Hand Tool]
When double-clicking the [Edit] window with the [Palm] tool, the diplay cale
will automatically change to fit the window.
・[Allow Lines With Widths Less Than 1 Pixel]
When checked, you can draw ub-pixel line with the Draw tool.
When unchecked, line will be forced to be at leat one pixel.
・[Pen Weight]
Diplay the amount of inhibition when the tablet pen i being waved. When
the value i high, the line will be mooth, a the value get maller, the line will
be come more detailed.
The proceing time for the pen’ movement i et; the longer the line i, the
longer it will take to diplay.
Printing ScanningConfigure preference for Printing and scanning.
Configure preference for Printing.
・[Wait for ~Before Printing Next Page]
set the tandby time per page when electing multiple page to print from the
[Edit] window [Page File] tab.
・[Use Memory Saver Mode For Monochrome Printing]
If a printer problem occur while thi option i elected, it may be remedied
with the memory aver mode.
・[Use Memory Saver Mode When Sending To Print Buffer] If a printer problem occur while thi option i elected, it may be remedied
with the memory aver mode.
・[Force Multi-part Print Compatibility]
some printer model may not handle multi-part printing correctly. Check the
box to fix thi problem.
Scan
Configure preference for canning.
・[Use Maximum of . . . Threads for Output]
set the number of thread (1-3) to ue for outputting image.
When outputting multiple page, your computer may run out of reourcedepending on it pecification and current environment. If o, the proce will
terminate. Lower the number of thread to 1 to fix the problem.
・[Close Dialog Box Each Time During Continuous Scan] (EX only)
Cloe the canner ide etting window when canning continuouly.
Do not normally ue [Ue Memory saver Mode When sending To Print Buffer] and
[Ue Memory saver Mode For Monochrome Printing].
Explanation
The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 15/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 16/415
Manga Studio
16
Folder PathThi et the ave location of the Uer Data Folder.
Folder Path
Manage the aving, copying, etc of the Uer Data Folder.
The Uer Data Folder where the created data for pen etting, preference, etc of
Manga studio are aved.
・[User Data Folder Location]
select the location of the Uer Data Folder. setting will come into effect after
next tartup of Manga studio.
・[Copy Folder... ]
Copy the Uer Data Folder to a elected location to erve a a back up.
・[Browse Folder]
Change the location of the Uer Data Folder.
Optionsset the diplay for the Pallete or Color Profile, etc.
View
There are a number of diplay etting.
・[Display Color Palette Selection Items]
select the color of the [Layer] pallete item and [Hitory] pallete item.
・[Beginner’s Assistant Display Location]
Diplay the [Beginner' Aitant] on the [Left] or [Right]
・[Properties Palette Extension Method]
select whether the [Propertie] pallete expand from the [Left], [Right] or
[According To Tab].
・[Save Default View Settings For Each Page]
When checked, the diplay tate of the [Ruler Manipulator], [Ruler Handle],
[selection Launcher], etc. will be aved with each page. The diplay tate at thetime you aved the page will be retored when you open it. Thi i the ame a
prior behavior. When unchecked, the diplay tate of the [Ruler Manipulator],
[Ruler Handle], [selection Launcher], etc. will be the ame for all page. The
diplay tate at the time you aved the page will not be retored.
Units
Configure preference for the text unit.
・[Text Units]
From the [Text] tool, the unit ize of the input character [Q] (Q value)
and [pt] (Point) can be elected.
Icc ProfileConfigure preference for color profile data.
・[CMYK Profile]
Configure the CMYK profile.
・[RGB Profile]
Configure the RGB profile.
・[Rendering Intent]
Configure the Rendering Intent.
The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].
Do not place Manga studio and other application or ytem file folder in the [Uer
Folder Location].
If other data i placed in thi folder, Manga studio could fail to tart or function
correctly.
Notes IME Controls
Configure preference for IME control.・[Automatically Set IME to ON When Starting To Edit Text Layer]
Enable IME automatically when tarting to enter text in a [Text Layer].
Depending on your IME etting, you will be able to enter full-width text when
you begin text editing without preing the [Half-width/Full-width] key.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 17/415
UserGuide
17
C h a p t e r
1
G e t t i n g S t a r
t e d
Export & Import
Copy the preference to allow haring and importing.
Export
By clicking on the [Export] button on any page of the [Preference] window detailed
preference can be exported. The [Preference] file type will have a.pff extenion.
Import
By clicking on the [Import] button on the [Preference] window, the uer can return
to prior etting by chooing a previouly aved [Preference] file (Extenion: pff).
When importing preference, all previou preference will be deleted. Before
importing etting, check all etting carefully.
NOTE
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 18/415
Manga Studio
18
:
Manga Studio
Shortcut preferences (For EX only)03
An introduction to shortcut modification and assignment method.
Shortcut preference basics
5
4
1
2
3
1 select either the [Menu], [Tool] or [Other] tab.
2 select the hortcut you want to change from [Category] or [Command].
3 Click the [New aignment] box and enter the key to be aigned to thehortcut from the keyboard.
4 When the entered key i diplayed in the [New aignment] column, click the
[Aign] button.
5 When you click the [OK] button, the hortcut will be aved.
You can modify or aign new hortcut.
select [shortcut setting] from the [File] menu.
1. Select Menu
[Shortcut Settings] window will be diplayed.
2. Change Preferences
・[Current Assignment] column
Diplay the current hortcut for the elected command.
・[New Assignment] column
The uer can enter the key for the new aignment.
・[Assignment] display
Diplay the name of the command aigned to the key entered in[New aignment].
How to read the [Shortcut preferences] window
・[Assign] button
Confirm the hortcut from the [New aignment] column.
・[Clear] button
Clear the hortcut from the [Current Aignment] and [New aignment]
column.
・[Reset All]
Reet all hortcut etting.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 19/415
UserGuide
19
C h a p t e r
1
G e t t i n g S t a r
t e d
:
Manga Studio
Custom Tool Settings(For EX only)04
Here we will introduce how to save tools and menus to the [Custom Tool] palette.
Custom tool preference basicsThe [Cutom Tool] palette allow uer to freely ave tool and menu to make thing eaier.
select [Cutom Tool setting] from the [File] menu.
1. Select Menu
1 Click the [New setting...] button, and when the [Cutom Tool new preference]
window ha been diplayed, enter the name, and click the [OK] button.
2 select the [Menu] or [Tool] tab.
3 Nominate the [Menu] or [Tool] you want to ave from the [Category]
4 If you click the [Add] button from the [Menu/Tool] column, it will be added to
the [Cutom Tool Palette] column.
5 When you click the [OK] button, it will be aved to the [Cutom Tool] palette.
5
1
4
2
3
The [Cutom Tool setting] window will be diplayed.
2. Change preferences
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 20/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 21/415
第2
章
第1 章
第 3 章
第4 章
第 5 章
Files
Chapter 2
In this chapter we will introduce file and page operation.
Step: 01 File Operation 024
Step: 02 Page operation 035
Step: 03 Page 040
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
Step: 04 Import 042
Step: 05 Export 052
Step: 06 save 057
Step: 07 Print 064
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 22/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 23/415
User Guide
23
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
Regarding file compatibility
save Ver. 3. 0 file a Ver.
4. 0 file
Ver. 3.0 file can be opened in Ver. 4. 0. When
aved, they can be changed to Ver. 4. 0 file.
save a Ver. 4. 0 file a
a Ver. 3. 0 file
・ In Ver. 4.0, elect [save a] from the [File] menu,
and chooe the [save multiple], with the [save
in compatible type] option. By clicking the [OK]
button, the file will ave in Ver 3.0 file type.
Compatibility with previou verion of Manga studio:
Notes when converting from Ver 4. 0 to Ver 3. 0
・ Apart from the [Rater layer] and [Vector layer] [Color (32bit)] attribute, the [Revere
layer], [Layer folder], [Text folder] and [sketch layer] can be imported a i.
・[Rater layer] and [Vector layer] [Color (32bit)] will be lot.
・[Balloon layer]: Will be eparated into balloon image and text.
・[Panel Folder]: Converted to [Frame group layer]
・[Guide line ruler], [Concentric circle ruler], [symmetrical] will be lot.
・The [Making layer] on the page will be lot.
・When there are more than 2 making layer on a frame, all but the firt will be lot.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 24/415
Manga Studio
24
Create New File
When creating a new file, you can elect from variou detailed etting.
Create new → Title (Custom Page)
select the Dimenion and create a [story] file.
1. Select the command
select [Create New story] → [story] through the [File] menu.
1
2
3
1 Configure Page size, etc.
2 set the number of page, etc.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3. Creation of the [Story] file is complete.
When the [story] file creation i complete, double-click the thumbnail of
the deired page. The [Edit] window [Page File] tab will open and ketchingcan begin.
2. Change settings
The [New story] window will be diplayed.
(Check that [Cutom Page] i diplayed)
Create new → Title (Page Templates)
[select from the Page Template] and create a [story] file.
1. Select the command
select [Create New story] → [story] through the [File] menu.
2. Change settingsThe [New story] window will be diplayed.
1 select the [Page Template] tab.
2 selected the [Page Template] file by chooing a category and ub-category
from the left.
3 Double clicking the [Page Template] file will diplay the [Page template
etting] window. The configuration can now be checked.
6
25
1
3
For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new
page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』( ⇒ P. 30)
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 25/415
User Guide
25
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
3. Creation of the [Story] file is complete.
When the [story] file creation i complete, and double-click the thumbnail of
the deired page, and the [Edit] window [Page File] tab will open and ketching
can take place.
4 Click the [OK] button on the [Page Template] window.
5 set the number of page, etc.
6 Click the [OK] button on the [New story] window.
4
・ The [Page template etting] created in the [Uer] folder can have all but the
[Baic reolution] and [Page size] modified at a later date. The item with digital
key in the [Page template etting] aved in the [Default] folder cannot be
changed.・ For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new
page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』( ⇒ P. 30)
・ For detail of the [Page Template] icon refer to『How to read [Page Template]
tab icon』( ⇒ P. 31)
Explanation
How to read a Page
On a Manga studio page there i [Baic Frame] which hold the frame and the
[Finih Frame] or [Offet] which repreent the book cut poition.
AB
B A
C
D
D
C
A [Page size]The ize of the page a a whole.
B [Basic Frame]
The tandard frame for the panel layout.
C [Finish Frame]
The cut line when the page i printed into a book.
A picture can be printed to here.
D [Offset]
A tandby area in cae the [Finih Frame] line goe off coure when the book ibeing cut.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 26/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 27/415
User Guide
27
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
4 Click the [OK] button on the [Page Template] window.
5 select the [Page structure].
6 Click the [OK] button on the [New Page] window.
3. [Page File] file creation is complete
When the [Page File] file creation i completed, open the [Page File] tab in the
[Edit] window and begin ketching.
4
・ The [Page template etting] created in the [Uer] folder can have all but the
[Baic reolution] and [Page size] modified at a later date but item with
digital key in the [Page template etting] aved in the [Default] folder cannot
be changed.・ For detail on each window item, refer to the 『How to read the [New title/
new page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』(⇒P. 30)
・ For detail of the [Page Template] icon refer to 『How to read [Page Template]
tab icon』(⇒P. 31)
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 28/415
Manga Studio
28
How to read [Create new title/new page] window [Custom Page] tab
When you elect from [File] menu [New story] → [story] or [Page File], the [New
story] window will be diplayed.
In the [Cutom Page] tab, et the ize in detail and create a new [Page File] or [story].
・[Standard Resolution]
select from 72 ~ 1200dpi for the page reolution.
・[Basic Color Model]
select from [Monochrome] or [Color(32bit)].
・[Page size]
set the ize of the page.
[Width] and [Height] will be diplayed in pixel unit.
・[Units]
select unit of meaurement.
[select from mm], [cm], [in] (inche), [px] (Pixel) or [pt] (Point).
・[Width] (Page size)
set the page width between 3. 0 ~ 42. 0cm.
・[Height] (Page size)
set the page height between 3. 0 ~ 42. 0cm.
・[Page size] list
select the Page size from a regular ize.select from [B4], [B5], [B6], [A3], [A4], [A5], [A6], [Potcard],
[Cutom].
・[Inside Dimension]
set the ize of the inner frame (Baic Frame, Finih Frame, Offet) and diplay
guideline on the page.
・[Width] (Finish Frame)
set the printed ize width.
set thi larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].
・[Height] (Finish Frame)
set the printed ize height.set thi larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].
・[Finish Frame]
select the Finih Frame ize from a regular ize.
select from [B4], [B5], [B6], [A3], [A4], [A5], [A6], [Potcard].
・[Custom]
set larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].
・[Basic Frame] list
select the etting for the [Baic Frame].[set size] i et in the ize poition.
[set margin] can be et from up, down, left and right poition.
・[Width], [Height] (Basic Frame size setting)
set the [Baic Frame] width.
・[Width], [Height] (Basic Frame size setting)
set the [Baic Frame] height.
・[Offset X] (Basic Frame: Set size)
set the [Baic Frame] width poition.
・[Offset Y] (Basic Frame: Set size)
set the [Baic Frame] height poition.
・[Top edge] (Basic Frame: Set margin)
set the ditance of the top of the [Baic Frame] from the top edge of the paper.
・[Bottom edge] (Basic Frame: Set margin)
set the ditance of the bottom of the [Baic Frame] from the bottom edge of the
paper.
・[Outside] (Basic Frame: Set margin)
set the ditance of the right or left hand ide of the [Baic Frame] from the [stitching
Poition] direction.
・[Header] (Basic Frame: Set margin)
set the ditance of the right or left hand ide of the [Baic Frame] from the outer
[stitching Poition] direction.
・[Offset width]
set the offet width between 0. 0 ~ 10. 0cm.
The offet i a tandby area in cae the [Finih Frame] line goe off coure when the
book i being cut. Draw up to thi outer frame when you want to print to the edge of
the page.
・[Preview]
An image of the page et in thi dialog will be diplayed.
・[No. of pages] ([Story] only)
set the number of page in the title from 1 ~ 99.
In the lit you can elect from [1], [2], [4], [8], [12], [16], [24] or [32]
・[Stitch Position] ([Story] only)
select the book titch direction from [Right titch] or [Left titch].
・[Start page] ([Story] only)
select whether the firt page will tart from the [Right] page or the [Left] page.
・[Page Structure]
select whether you want a [simple page] or a [spread].
・[Story Info] button
The [story Info] window will be diplayed and [story Info], [Author Information], [Page
number], [Number setting] etc can be configured.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 29/415
User Guide
29
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
How to read the [Story Info] dialog How to read the [Page TEmplates] tab icon
When you elect from [File] menu [Create New story] → [story] or [Page File], the
[New story] window will be diplayed.
Thee are the icon which are ued in the [Page Template].
・[Story Info]
Input the [Title], [Epiode], [subtitle] and elect from [Bottom Left] or [BottomRight] for the [Diplay Poition].
・[Author Information]
select from [Author name] and [Bottom Left] or [Bottom Right] for [Diplay
Poition].
・[Page Number]
select from [Bottom Left] or [Bottom Right] for the diplay poition of the page
number aigned to a [story] in Manga studio.
・[Number Settings]
Diplay and configure the actual page number (pagination) when the title
become a book.
・[Format]
Input pecial character in the pagination bordering both ide.
・[Start Number]
Input tarting number in the pagination.
・[Font]
select the font to be ued in pagination.
・[Font Size]
Input ize of pagination.
・[Display Position]
select the pagination diplay poition from [Inide], [Outide], [Center] or
[Hidden Number].
・[Apply Settings To All Pages]
Reflect et information and [Diplay Poition] to all page a per the elected rule.
select from: [Apply setting Content And Diplay Poition], [Apply Only setting
Content] and [Apply Only Diplay Poition].
Diplay the [story Info] window by electing from the [File] menu [Create New
story] → [story], and then electing the [story Info] button from the [New story]
window.
Configure the [story Info], [Author Information], [Page Number], [Number
setting] etc.
A B C D E F G H I J
A [Move up]
Move up one level of folder.
B [Move down]
Move down one level of folder.
C [Page settings]
A confirmation [Page template etting] window will be diplayed.
For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new
page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』( ⇒ P. 30)
D [Create new page]A window will open for creating a new page where it will be poible to enter
each [Page template etting] item.
For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new
page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』( ⇒ P. 30)
E [Create new folder]
Create a new folder in the current level.
F [Delete]
Delete the currently elected folder or [Page Template].
G [Icon]
Diplay the [Page Template] file or folder diplayed on the right with a large icon.
H [List]
Diplay the [Page Template] file or folder icon diplayed on the right with the
page name in a lit.
I [Details]Lit the [Page Template] file or folder icon and [Page name], [Page size], [Baic
reolution], [Finih size], [Baic Frame size] and [Offet width] diplayed on the
right in a lit.
J [Show Menu]Diplay the page etting menu.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 30/415
Manga Studio
30
Saving a File
The file ave method are: [save], [save a], [save title with eparate name] and
[save all].
・When aving [story] file and [Page File] file, under the default etting they
will be aved a follow:
Vita: [start] button → [Document]
XP: [start] button → [My Document]
Explanation
Save (Story file)
Overwrite the [story] file over the ame file.You will be aked for the file name and ave location on the firt time only.
1. Select the Command
With the [story] file opened, elect [save] from the [File] menu.
3. Save Complete
The [story File] ha been aved.
2. Configure Settings
Uually, when the command i elected it will overwrite. However, during the
firt ave only, the [save] window will be diplayed.
2
1
1 Confirm [save Location].
2 Click the [OK] button.
Save title with different name (Title file)
save the previouly aved [story] a a eparate [story] with a different name.
3. Save Complete
The [story] file ha been aved with a different name.
2. Change Settings
The [save] window will be diplayed.
How to read the [Save] window ([Story] file)
・[Save as]
Enter the name of the ave file.
・[Save Copy]
save [story] file in the middle of editing a a copy with a different name.
When turned off, when the file being edited i aved a a different name it will
witch to that file.
・[Save as Compatible type]
A copy of the [story] file will be aved in Manga studio 3-compatible format.
Thi can be elected when [save copy] i on.
1. Select the Command
With the [story] file opened, elect [save title with different name] from the
[File] menu.
3
1
2
1 Confirm [save Location].
2 Configure the name of the ave file and the f ile type.
3 Click the [OK] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 31/415
User Guide
31
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
Save with separate name (Page files)
save the [Page File] file from the previouly aved title a a eparate [Page File]
with a different name.
3. Save Complete
The [Page File] ha been aved with a eparate name.
2. Change settings
The [save] window will be diplayed.
Save (Page file)
Overwrite the [Page File] file over the ame file.
You will be aked for the file name and ave location on the firt time only.
2
1
1. Select the command
With the [Page File] file opened, select [Save] from the [File] menu.
2. Configure settings
Uually, when the command i elected it will overwrite but for the firt time
only, the [save] window will be diplayed.
3. Save Complete
The [Page File] ha been aved.
1 Confirm [save Location]
2 Click the [OK] button.
3
1. Select the command
With the [Page File] file opened, elect [save story A] from the [File] menu.
Confirm [save location].
1 Confirm [save Location].
2 Configure the name of the ave file and the file type.
3 Click the [OK] button.
1
2
How to read the [Save] window ([Page File] file)
・[Save As]
Enter the name of the ave file.
・[Save Copy]save [Page File] file in the middle of editing a a copy with a different name.
When turned off, when the file being edited i aved a a different name it will
witch to that file.
・[Save as compatible type]
A copy of the [Page] file will be aved in Manga studio 3-compatible format.
Thi can be elected when [save Copy] i on.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 32/415
Manga Studio
32
Open FilesHere we dicu how to open aved [story] and [Page File] file.
Open
Open a aved [story] or [Page File] file.
1. Select the Command
select [Open] through the [File] menu.
1 select the [story] or [Page File] file.
2 Click the [Open] button.
1
2
3. Open file
File will be opened.
2. Select the File
The [Open file] window will be diplayed.
Save All
save all open [Page File] and [story] file.
For all file not aved to thi point a file name or ave location window will be
diplayed.
1. Select the Commandselect [save all] through the [File] menu.
Revert
Revert file content in the middle of editing to the lat aved condition.
Dicard the currently edited content.
select [Revert] from the [File] menu.
Open Most Recent Used File
Recently opened [Page File] or [story] file will be diplayed in a lit and theelected file can be opened and edited.
3. save completeThe [story] or [Page File] file ha been aved
Recently opened [Page File] or [story] file will be diplayed in a lit and the
elected file can be opened and edited.
select [Mot Recent Ued File] from the [File] menu.
2
1
1` Confirm [save Location].
2 Click the [OK] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 33/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 34/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 35/415
User Guide
35
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
Select Paper and Insert
Inert a new [Page File] file with different page etting to the current page.
4. Insert Complete
A new page elected in the [Inert page] dialog will be inerted after the
elected [Page File] file.
2. Select Commandselect [select Page and Inert] from the [story] menu.
1. Select the Page
Select the page through the [Story] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Select Page
select page from the [Inert Page] dialog.
1 select the paper.
2 set the number of page and inertion poition.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3
12
Copy Page
You can now copy page when page thumbnail are being diplayed in the [Edit]
window. You can copy them on the following creen:
・ [Edit] Window [Story] Tab
・ [Edit] Window [Page] Tab → [Page List]
・ From the [Story] menu, select [View] → [Page List] to show the
[Page List].
1
1 select the thumbnail of the page you want to copy.
2
2 From the [story] menu, elect [Copy Page].
3
3 The elected page will be copied.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 36/415
Manga Studio
36
When repeatedly uing the ame command in the [story] menu, the command will
witch from diplay to non-diplay. Thi will apply when checked.
Explanation
It i poible to view page pread, or view ingle page eparately.
2. Select the command
select [spread] through the [story] menu.
Open two page spread, open single
page (EX only)
1. Select Page
Through [story] tab of the [Edit] window elect the page to be combined with
the next page.
View Page Spreads.
Conecutive page file from the [story] file will be combined in a [spread].
3. Combination complete
The 2 [Page File] file will be combined and a two page pread will be et.
Make Single Page
From the [story] tab in the [Edit] window, elect the page et a a pread and from
the [story] menu, elect [Make ingle page] and the pread page will be eparated
into ingle page.
Adjust Print Guide
From the [Edit] window [Page File] tab with two page pread, the [Adjut Print
Guide] can be elected from the [Edit] menu to adjut the print guide.
Page display
You can witch the diplay in the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Switch Displays
[Page Lit] will be diplayed.
Page List
[Page Lit] will be diplayed or not diplayed.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Diplay] →[Page Lit] through the [story] menu, and check.
Page Information
2. Select the Command
select [Diplay] →[Page Information] through the [story] menu, and check.
[Page Information] will be diplayed or not diplayed.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Switch Displays
[Page Information] will be diplayed.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 37/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 38/415
Manga Studio
38
:
Manga Studio
Page03
You can change each setting of the page.
Change Title InformationYou can change the [story] file title information uch a [Author] [story name], etc.
Modify Binding Position/ Start PageChanging
You can change the [story] file' binding poition and opening page.
1. Open the [Story]
Open the [story] file through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Change story setting] from the [story] menu.
3. Change the InformationWhen the [story Info] dialog i diplayed, confirm title information etting and
click the [OK] button.
・Title information can alo be et with the [New story] dialog [story Info] button.
・ On the [Page File] file, there i no「story Info」o title information cannot be changed.
Application operation & explanation
1. Open the [Story]
Open the [story] file through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Modify cloing poition and opening page] from the [story] menu.
3. Modify Closing Position and Opening Page
When the [Binding Poition/start Page setting] window i diplayed, change the
etting and click the [OK] button.4. Modifications are Complete
Title information modification are complete.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 39/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 40/415
Manga Studio
40
:
Manga Studio
Import04
You can import a [Page File] file, picture file, Photoshop file or paper data.
Page FileImport [Page File] file and inert into [story] file.
[Page File] file import i complete.4. Import is Complete
1. Open the [Story]
Open the [story] file through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Import] → [Page file] from the [File] menu.
3. Select the [Page File] file
The [Open File] window will be diplayed.
1 select the [Page File] file.
2 Click the [Open] button.
2
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 41/415
User Guide
41
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
Multi-layer filesMultiple layer of a [Page File] file can be imported.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Import] → [Multi-layer file] from the [File] menu.
Multi-layer file import i complete.
4. Import is complete
3. Select the folder where the layer file is saved
The [Browe For Folder] window will be diplayed.
1 select the folder where the layer file i aved. In the folder where the [Page
File] file i, it will be aved under the name [layer].
2 Click the [OK] button.
2
1
Layer FileImport one layer only to the [Page File] file.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Import] → [Layer file] from the [File] menu.
3. Select the folder where the layer file is saved
The [Browe For Folder] window will be diplayed.
1 select the [Layer] folder which i inide the folder containing the [Page File]
file from the [story] file and elect the deired layer file.
2 Click the [OK] button.
Layer file import i complete.
4. Import is complete
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 42/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 43/415
User Guide
43
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
1 When you click on the [Image adjut] tab in the [Propertie] window, the [Layer
setting] tab will be diplayed.
2 In the [Layer setting] tab, you can configure the baic layer etting.
2
1
Click the [OK] button of the [Propertie] window when etting are complete. The
layout of the imported image i complete.
6. Import is complete.
5. Adjust Image (Layer Settings)
1
1 When you click on the [Filter etting] tab from the [Propertie] window [Image
Adjut] tab, the [Filter setting] tab will be diplayed.
In the [Layer setting] tab inide the [Image Adjut] tab, the image can be adjuted.
When you elect [sketch layer] from [Type] in the [Layer setting] tab, it will change
to [sketch Layer].
For more about [sketch layer], refer to『sketch Layer』( ⇒ P. 150)
Explanation
EX only: Adjust image (Filter Settings)
With the [Image Adjut] tab, [Filter setting] ub tab, you can call up one filter and
adjut the image. Pleae ue a required.
Refer to "Chapter 9. Filter" ( ⇒ p. 255) for creating the election.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 44/415
Manga Studio
44
A [Undo] and [Redo]
[Undo] and [Redo] can be performed on the action in [Adjut Poition].
B [Flip Vertical] and [Flip Horizontal]
The image can be flipped vertically or horizontally.
C [Show Guide Line] and [Hide]
The diplay and non-diplay of the guide line can be toggled.
Diplay it for the cae of adjuting through the drag operation with diplay of
handle in the image' periphery.
[Processing Types]
select the proceing type from [scale], [Rotate], [Free Tranform], [Ditort], and
[Perpective].
Dragging the handle in the image' periphery work in repone to the elected
proceing.
[Scale]
specifie the cale of the image in percentage of [Width] and [Height].
・[Relative Value]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the current condition.
After confirmation, it revert to 100%.
・[Abolute Value]:
Input the ratio of change (caling) from the initial condition.When you change the image uing [Rotate], [Free tranform], [Ditort], etc, you
will loe the ability to et.
[Keep Aspect Ratio]
scale while keeping to the horizontal and vertical ratio of the image.
[Position]
The image poition i pecified in mm for [Left] and [Top].
[Angle]
specifie the image' rotation angle.
[Auto Adjust...]The [auto Adjut] panel will be diplayed and nominated item will be diplayed.
A BC
In the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab the poition, ize etc of the
image can be adjuted.
[Based On The Paper]
・[Position]
Adjut [Paper], [Print Guide Inner], [Print Guide Outer] and [Baic Frame].
・[Page File]
select the item which make up the baic poition for a two page pread. [Left
page] and [Right page].
・[Direction]
・ [Up] [Down]: Zoom in/out, adjuting poition up or down keeping in proportion
to the width of the image in the elected [Poition] ize.
・ [Left] [Right]: Zoom in/out, adjuting poition left or right keeping in proportion
to the height of the image in the elected [Poition] ize.
[Based On The Image]
・[Pixel Ratio To The Original Image]
set the pixel ratio to the original image by percentage.
[Align To Previously Loaded Position]
Adjut to previouly loaded poition and ize.
In the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Auto Adjut] the poition, ize
etc of the image will be automatically adjuted.
How to read the [Properties] window [Move and Transform] tab How to read the [Properties] window [Auto Adjust] panel
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 45/415
User Guide
45
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
[Properties] window [Layer Settings] tab
When the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Layer setting] tab i
elected image adjutment can be made.
[Layer Name]
Enter the name of the layer.
[Layer Type]
select the layer type a either [Rater layer] or [sketch layer] from the file to be
imported.
[Resolution]
select the reolution of the layer.
[Color Mode]select the expreion mode for the layer from [Black], [Black and white], [Grey]
and [Color].
[Output Attributes]
select from [sketch] or [Finihed].
[Bitmap Technique]
When the [Expreion Mode] i [Black] or [Black White], it will be bitmapped.
Here you will be aked to elect from [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and
[Diffuion] for the bitmap method.
[Monerization Method]
When importing the [Expreion mode] in [Grey], a a layer etting you can electfrom [No tone reduction], [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and [Diffuion].
[Threshold]
set the threhold value when bitmapping.
[Paste White As Transparent]
Change the white part of the image to t ranparent.
[View Page Image]
Diplay the page image to be imported a a preview.
[Filter Settings]
select filter item to be run from [Brightne/Contrat], [Tone Curve], [Tone
Reveral], [Poterization], [Brightne and Contrat (Automatic Correction)] and
[Level Correction]. Four filter can be performed imultaneouly.
[Settings]
In the etting item filter, detailed proceing etting can be configured.
[Properties] window [Filter settings] tab
When the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Filter setting] tab i
elected image adjutment can be made uing filter.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 46/415
Manga Studio
46
Photoshop file (EX only)Import a Photohop file with eparated layer into the [Page File] file.
2. Select the Command
select [Import] → [Photohop file] from the [File] menu.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Select the Photoshop file
The [Open] window will be diplayed.
1 select the Photohop file that you want to import.
2 Click the [Open] button.
1
2
Import will be complete and will be diplayed on the [Page File] a multiple [Layer].
5. Import is Complete
Configure etting with the [Import Photohop File] window.
4. Configure Photoshop file settings
1 By checking layer on or off in the layer lit, you can elect which layer to import.
2 Configure import etting for the elected layer.
3 Click the [OK] button.
1
3
2
[Import Photoshop File] window
[Layer List]
select the layer to be imported.
[Layer Merge And Import]
Import a Photohop file a a ingle image file.
[Jointly Use Layer Settings]
Rather than having individual etting for each layer, one etting can apply to
all layer.
[Paste White As Transparent]
Change the white part of the image to t ranparent and import. Item
applicable to all layer.
[Layer Settings]
For each individual original layer you can configure the etting.
・Layer Name
Enter the name of the layer.
・Layer Type
select the layer type of either [Rater layer] or [sketch layer] from the file to be
imported.
・Resolution
select the reolution of the layer.
・Color model
select the expreion mode for the layer from [Black], [Black and White], [Grey]
and [Color].
・Output Attribute
select from [sketch] or [Finih].
・Bitmap Technique
When the [Baic Color Model] i [Black] or [Black White], it will be bitmapped.
Here you will be aked to elect from [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and
[Diffuion] for the bitmap method. .
・Monerization Method
When importing the [Expreion mode] in [Grey], a a layer etting you
can elect from [No Tone Reduction], [Threhold], [Peudo Gradation] and
[Diffuion] a the Monerization Method.
・Threshold Value
When electing [Threhold] for the [Bitmap Method] or [Monerization Method],
nominate the threhold value.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 47/415
User Guide
47
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
TWAINUing an aftermarket canner, you can import an image a layer on a [Page File].
1. Connect the scanner.
Connect the aftermarket canner. For detail regarding the intallation of driverand connection method, pleae refer to the owner' manual that came with your
canner.
When you elect [Import] → [TWAIN] from the [File] menu, the canner driver will
be diplayed.
scanning method will differ according to the canner, pleae refer to the owner'
manual which came with your canner.
4. Scan
1 Configure reolution, etc.
2 Click the [Preview] button.
1
2
3 At the canner driver creen, adjut the can poition, etc and import. The
etting method will differ between canner.
4 Click the [Import] button.
Preview will be diplayed.
4
3
2. Select scanner driver.
1
3. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.
2
When you elect [File] menu → [Import] → [select TWAIN Device], the [select
source] window will be diplayed.
1 select the canner driver.
2 Click the [select] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 48/415
Manga Studio
48
Continuous Scan (EX only)Uing an aftermarket canner, you can import multiple page image into a [story]
a [Page File] layer.
1. Connect the Scanner
Connect the aftermarket canner. For detail regarding the intallation of driverand connection method, pleae refer to the owner' manual which came with
your canner.
2. Select scanner driver
Begin with the [story] file cloed.
When you elect [File] menu → [Import] → [select TWAIN Device], the [select
source] window will be diplayed.
1
2
1 select the canner driver.
2 Click the [select] button.
When you elect [File] → [Import] → [Continuou can], a [New story] window
will be diplayed.
4. Configure settings for continuous scan
3
21
3. Open the Title
Open the Title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
1 Configure Page size, etc.
2 set number of page.
3 Click the [OK] button.
When the imported image i diplayed on the [Page File] tab of the [story] file,
follow tep 4-6 from importing an [Image File]. For detail, refer to "Image File
( ⇒ P. 44).
Once the import etting have been confirmed, pre the [Enter] key.
5. Scanning is Complete
The canned image will be diplayed on the page and canning i complete.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 49/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 50/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 51/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 52/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 53/415
User Guide
53
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
How To Read The [JPEG Settings] Window
・[Quality]
set the JPEG image compreion ratio (quality).
How to read the [Photoshop settings] Window
Configure the layer contruction.
・[Merge Layers Then Output]
Merge into 1 image with no hierarchy.
・[Keep Layer Structure For Output]
Output whilt maintaining each layer' tructure.
・[Output Layer Set (From Photoshop 6. 0 Or Later)]
Change layer folder to layer et and output.You can elect from [Only Allow 1 Layer] or [Up to 5 Layer (From Photohop Cs
onward)] for the converion condition.
・[Output Text As Text Layer]
Output text a a layer.
How To Read The [TIFF Settings] Window (EX only)
When [Color] i elected in [Color depth], it will witch to [Output In CMYK
format] etting.
・[Output In CMYK format]
Output In CMYK format.
[Icc Profile Settings]
select the Icc profile to be ued.
・[CMYK Profile]
select from [EuropeIsOCoatedFOGRA27. icc], [JapanColor2001Coated. icc],
[UssheetfedCoated. icc], etc a the CMYK Icc profile.
・[RGB Profile]
select from [AdobeRGB1998. icc], [AppleRGB. icc], [ColorMatchRGB. icc] and
[RGB Color space Profile. icm] a the RGB Icc profile.
・[Rendering Intent]
select from [Perceptual], [Keep relative color gamut], [Color aturation], [Keep
abolute color gamut] for the color converion method.
How to read the [PDF settings] Window (EX only)
・[Quality]
set PDF Quality.
How to read the [Color settings] Window
[Image Output Settings]
select from [Output in Layer Color], [Output in Cyan] or [Output in Black] for
each output color.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 54/415
Manga Studio
54
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 55/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 56/415
Manga Studio
56
Save materials (EX only)
You can ave page, frame plit, layer, tone material, bubble material, character
material, pattern bruh material, etc to the [Material] window.
Refer to『Chapter 14 step: 01 Material 』( ⇒ P. 374) on how to ue material.
・ When the material i aved, in default etting it will be aved a below.
Vita: [start] button → [Document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ¥Material
XP: [start] button → [My document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ¥Material・ saved material can be dragged and dropped from the [Material] window to
the [story].
Explanation Application operation
Page
save the [Page File] file to the [Material] window.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page File] tab or [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the command
select [save material] → [Page File] through the [File] menu.
3. Save is completeThe [Page File] file will be aved to the [Material] window [Material]→ [Uer] folder.
Frame split
save the frame plit etting to the [Material] window.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page File] tab or [story] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the commandselect [save material] → [Frame plit] through the [File] menu.
・When the material i aved, in default etting it will be aved a below.
Vita: [start] button → [Document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ¥Material
XP: [start] button → [My document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ¥Material・ saved material can be dragged and dropped from the [Material] window to
the [Page File].
Explanation Application operation
3. Save is complete
The [Page File] file will be aved to the [Material] window [Material]→ [Uer] folder.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 57/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 58/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 59/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 60/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 61/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 62/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 63/415
User Guide
63
C h a p t e r
2
F i l e s
PrintingPrint.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Edit] window [Page File] tab.
2. Select the Commandselect [Print] from the [File] menu.
3. Change preferences
The [Print] window will be diplayed.
1 select the printer.
2 Click the [OK] button.
1
2
4. It will print.
Printing i complete.
・[Paper]
select the [size] and printer [Paper source Method].
・[Print Orientation]
select from [Portrait] or [Landcape].
・[Margins (inches)]
set [Left], [Right], [Top], [Bottom] margin pace.
In the [Page setup] window the diplay will change depending on the environment.
How to read the [Page settings] window
Print Multiple Pages
Example
Here we will elect page 2-4 for printing.
1. Open the page list
select the range of page you want to print from the [Edit] window’ [story] tab.
Open the page lit from the [Edit] window’ [story] tab.
2. Select pages to print
There are two way elect the page you want:
・ Select with [Shift]-click
Hold down the [shift] key and click the firt and lat page in the range you want
to print. All the thumbnail in that range will how a red border.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 64/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 65/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 66/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 67/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 68/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 69/415
User Guide
69
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
Operation Method (Vector Drawing)
Vector drawing i done on the [Vector Layer].
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
[Vector Layer] i created in the [Layer] window.
1 select [Vector Layer] in [Type], and chooe etting.
Below are the tandard etting.
Type Vector Layer
Expreion Mode Black and White(2-bit)
2 Click the [OK] button.
2. Create the LayerClick the [Create New Layer] button in the [Layer] window.
Operation Method (Raster Drawing)
Rater drawing i done on the [Rater Layer].
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
1 select [Rater Layer] in [Type], and chooe etting. Below are the tandard etting.
Reolution 600. 0 dpi
Expreion Mode Black and White(2-bit)
Output Attribute Finih
2 Click the [OK] button.
[Rater Layer] i created in the [Layer] window.
2. Create the LayerDiplay the [Layer] window, and click the [Create New Layer] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 70/415
Manga Studio
70
Drawing Color [Gray]The [Gray] drawing color ha a color depth of 8 bit, and i elected from
[Expreion Mode] of [Rater Layer].
Concept 1: Gray Image
By uing [Convert to Tone] of [subtractive Method] of the [Gray] drawing color, theimage can be drawn o that it ha varying denity on a ingle layer.
・If [Tone Layer] is used
If the normal [Tone Layer] i ued, it i neceary to create a [Tone Layer] for
each denity.
・If [Convert to Tone] of [Gray] drawing color is used
An image can be drawn with varying denity on a ingle [Rater Layer] by
changing the denity in the [Color] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 71/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 72/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 73/415
User Guide
73
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
Drawing Color [Color]There are 2 type of drawing color with different depth and creation method.
Concept
・[Single Color]
The drawing area of one layer i diplayed in a ingle color.
It ha a color depth of 8 bit and below, and i elected from [Alternative Color
to Black] of the [Propertie] window.
The color conit of [single Color] and [Full Color].
・[Full Color]
Multiple color can be applied to one layer.
It ha a color depth of 32 bit, and i elected from [Expreion Mode] when
creating the [Rater Layer].
Operation Method: Single Color
After pecifying [Alternative Color to Black] of the [Propertie] window, pecify the
color by electing [Color] radio button at [Diplay Color].
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the layer
Diplay the [Layer] window, and elect the target layer.
3. Do the Choose settings
Diplay the [Propertie] window, and elect the [Color] radio button from
[Diplay Color].
4. The color that is set in [Alternative color to black] in the [Properties]
window will be applied as the single color.
The elected alternative color i alo diplayed on the icon of the layer in the [Layer]
window.
The color of [Alternative Color to Black] of the [Propertie] window can be changed
by double-clicking.
Application Operation
The graycale diplay and color diplay can alo be witched by clicking the [show
Color] button on the top left of the [Layer] window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 74/415
Manga Studio
74
Operation Method: Full Color
Create [Rater Layer] with [Expreion Mode] a [Color (32-bit)], and operate with
the drawing tool.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Create the Layer
Diplay the [Layer] window, and click the [Create New Layer] button.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
1 select [Color(32-bit)] a the [Expreion Mode].
2 Click the [OK] button.
A rater layer upported by [Color(32-bit)] i created.
4. Draw in color
Diplay the [Color] window, and elect the [Color] to be ued.
5. Draw in the image
When the drawing tool i ued on the page, it draw in full color.
3. Select the Tool
select the drawing tool from the [Tool] window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 75/415
User Guide
75
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
Operation Method: Edit Color
Edit the drawing color in the [Color setting] window.
1. Display the [Tools] window
Double-click the [Black] or [White] drawing color of the [Tool] window.
2. Display the [Color Settings] window
The [Color setting] window i diplayed.
1 select the color by clicking or by numerical input.
2 The elected color i diplayed in the [show selection Color] box.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3. Finish the color editing
The color of the [show selection Color] button i et a the drawing color.
1 2
3
Viewing of [Color Settings] Window
Double-clicking on [Black] or [White] drawing color of the [Color] window and
[Tool] window diplay the [Color setting] window.
A [Basic Settings] area
A 128-bit [Color sample] i lined up.
B [Color Settings] area (EX only)
Edit [Color setting].
C [Color Area]
select the color through clicking or by numerical input.
D [Color Slider]
select the color by clicking.
E [H]/[S]/[V]
set the color in [H]/[s]/[V].
F [R]/[G]/[B]
set the color in [R]/[G]/[B].
G [Show Selection Color] button
The currently elected color i diplayed.
Clicking ave the diplayed color to the color et.
H [Show Color Set] menu (EX only)
Diplay and elect the [Color set].
I [Get Color] (EX only)
Make the color elected in [Color set] the election color.
J [Save Color] (EX only)
save the current election color by overwriting to optional location of [Color set].
K [Add Color] (EX only)
Add the current election color to [Color set] a new.
L [Delete Color] (EX only)
Delete the color of the elected location in [Color set].
M [Edit Settings] button (EX only)
Addition or deletion from [Color set] can be made in the [Edit Color set] window.
N [Color Set] (EX only)
The [Color set] elected in the [show Color set] menu i diplayed.
・ The [set Color] dialog can only be diplayed when a layer of at leat[Color(32-bit)] i elected for [Expreion Mode] in the [Layer] window.
・ If election color i pecified from [Color set] of the [Color setting] area, click
the [Get Color] button after electing through clicking.
・[standard Color set] i a color et of the ame tructure a [Baic setting].
Explanation
1 1
1
A
B
C D
E F G
H
M
N
I J K L
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 76/415
Manga Studio
76
Tool Usage
When [show Lit] of [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option] window i elected,
the [Pen Tool Option] window lit i diplayed.
For the [Tool] window, right-clicking a tool icon further diplay a menu or icon.
[Tool] Palette
For ome of the tool icon, right clicking diplay more option.
For tool icon with ▼ hown at the bottom right of the icon, right-clicking or
holding down the click diplay a etting menu.When the tool icon menu i diplayed, it i poible to witch to another tool, and
when the tool etting menu i diplayed, the tool etting can be witched.
[Tools] Palette
Diplay of [Pen Tool Option] Palette/Tab
For [Pen Tool Option] window, clicking a tab or button further diplay a menu or icon.[[Pen Tool Options] Window
Manga Studio
Drawing03
The drawing tools include the [Pen], [Pencil], and [Magic Marker Marker] tools.
[stroke Preview] can be diplayed in both [show Tab] and [show Lit].
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 77/415
User Guide
77
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
[Tool Settings Menu]
Clicking the [Tool setting Menu] button diplay the [Tool setting Menu].
[Tool setting Menu]
[Brush Control] Window
Clicking the [Bruh Control] button of the [Pen Tool Option] window to diplay the
bruh control option.
[Bruh Control] Dialog
[Change Brush Shape Menu]
When the [Change Bruh shape Menu] button i clicked, the [Change Bruh shape
Menu] i diplayed.
[Change Bruh shape Menu]
[Edit Polygon] Window
Clicking [Edit Polygon] button of the [Change Bruh shape Menu] diplay the
[Edit Polygon] window.
[Edit Polygon] Window
[Change Tool Option Settings] Window
When [Change Tool Option setting] of [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option]
window i elected, the [Change Tool Option setting] window i diplayed.
[Change Tool Option setting] Window
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 78/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 79/415
User Guide
79
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
O [Display Size Affects Correction]
The intenity of Correction change in repone to the magnification of page
L [Correction Based on Speed]
Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed. The fater the movement,
the more intene it i.
M [Use size as the value on screen]
Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the drawing i done
with the curor ize in [size Preview].
N [Sharpen Angle]
Thi make the angle of the drawn line to become harp.
[Ue size a the Value on screen: Off] [Ue size a the Value on screen: On]
[Vector snap: Off] [Vector snap: On]
[sharpen Angle: Off] [sharpen Angle: On]
diplay.
P [Vector Snap] (EX only)
Thi aborb the line being drawn into line already drawn. It i valid for [Vector
Layer] only.
Q [Delete Overlapping Lines] (EX only)
R [Thickness]
Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the
left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
S [Direction]
Adjut the direction of the pen-tip hape. When the [Bruh Control] button on
the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
T [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)
For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, an anti-aliaed line i drawn.
U [Shape Preview]
Diplay a preview of pen-tip hape etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction]
by dragging.
V [Change Brush Shape Menu]
The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,
and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip hape.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 80/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 81/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 82/415
Manga Studio
82
Eraser ToolThe [Eraer] tool i eraing.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer][Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Operation Method
select the layer of the target image, and drag to erae.
1. Open the Page
Open the page on which to ue the eraer through [Page Number] tab of the
[Edit] window.
4. Erase
The image can be cleared by dragging on the page.
3. Select the Tool
select the [Eraer] tool from the [Tool] window.
In verion 4. 0, even when the eraer i applied to [Vector Layer] line, the inciion
i imilar to [Rater Layer].
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Eraer Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing Tool Options
J
K
L
M
N
E
F
G
H
A B
C
D
I
[Inciion on Rater Layer] [Inciion on Vector Layer]
Concept
The line drawn on a rater layer and vector layer can be cleared.
2. Select the layer
Diplay the [Layer] window, and elect the target layer.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 83/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 84/415
Manga Studio
84
Magic Marker Marker ToolThe [Magic Marker Marker] tool i ued for drawing uniform line that are not
ubject to the effect of pen preure on line width and denity.
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Magic Marker
Tool Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Stroke Preview]
Diplay the preview of troke hape etting.
E [Size]
Adjut the width of pen tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i
clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
F [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line.
G [Sharpen Angle]
Thi harpen the angle of the drawn line.
H [Use size as the value on screen]
Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the drawing i done
with the ize in [size Preview].
I [Correction]
Turn line Correction on/off, and adjut the intenity.
J [Size Preview]
Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the
preview i dragged.
K [Correction Based on Speed]
Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed.
I
J
K
N
L
M
E
F
G H
A B
C
D
S
O
P
Q
R
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer][Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer ]
[Vector Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
3. Draw
Dragging on the page draw the Magic Marker-marker line.
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Magic Marker Marker] tool from the [Tool] window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 85/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 86/415
Manga Studio
86
Pencil ToolThe [Pencil] tool i mainly ued for naming and ketching.
The [Pencil] tool allow drawing of graycale denity baed on pencil preure. The
diplay method change according to [subtractive Method] of the layer in ue. For
detail, refer to "Drawing Color: Gray"( ⇒ p. 72).
Explanation
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Pencil Tool Option]
window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Stroke Preview]
Preview the troke-hape etting.
E [Size]
Adjut the width of pen tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i
clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
F [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i
clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
G [In]
Turn [In] on/off, and adjut the intenity.
H [Out]
Turn [Out] on/off, and adjut the intenity.
I [Correction]
Turn line Correction on/off, and adjut the intenity.
J [In/Out Based on Speed]
Adjut the [In]/[Out] intenity baed on troke peed.
K [Correction Based on Speed]
Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed.
L [Size Preview]
Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the
preview i dragged.
Q
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
E
F
G
P
A B
C
D
R
S
O
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Pencil] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Draw
Dragging on the page draw the pencil line.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer][selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 87/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 88/415
Manga Studio
88
Calligraphy Pen (EX only)The [Bruh Pen] tool i ued for drawing cratchy line.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer][selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
3. Draw
Dragging on the page draw the bruh-pen line.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Bruh Pen] tool from the [Tool] window.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
[Denity]: 1, [Ink Amount]: 200 drawn line
[Denity]: 50, [Ink Amount]: 200 drawn line
[Denity]: 100, [Ink Amount]: 200 drawn line
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Bruh Pen Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
I
H
J
K L
E
F
G
A B
C
D
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool type.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Stroke Preview]
Diplay a preview of troke hape etting.
E [Size]
Adjut the width of pen tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i
clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
F [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i
clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
G [Density]
The number of trand in the pen' hair tip can be adjuted.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 89/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 90/415
Manga Studio
90
Pattern Brush ToolThe [Pattern Bruh] tool ue variou pattern to make a drawing, imilar to uing
a pen.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer][Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
3. Draw
Dragging on the page draw a continuou pattern.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Pattern Bruh] tool from the [Tool] window.
Right-click the [Pattern Bruh] tool o the [Tool setting Menu] i diplayed, and
then elect the tool etting for pattern bruh.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Pattern Bruh
Tool Option] window i diplayed.
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Stroke Preview]
Diplay a preview of troke hape etting.
E [Size]
Adjut the width of pen t ip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i clicked,
advanced etting can be made through the window.
F [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left iclicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
G [Hardness]
set the intenity of effect at pen' periphery. When the [Bruh Control] button
on the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
When thi etting i reduced, blurry line can be drawn.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
E
F
G
P
A B
C
D
O
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 91/415
User Guide
91
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
For the method of aving pattern material, refer to "save Pattern a Bruh
Material" ( ⇒ p. 63) (EX only).
Application Operation
H [Interval]
specifie the interval for the drawing of pattern. The maller the value, the
cloer the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i clicked,
advanced etting can be made through the window.
I [Size Preview]
Diplay a preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the
preview i dragged.
J [Thickness]
Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the
left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
K [Direction]
Adjut the direction of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the
left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
L [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)
For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, thi draw an anti-aliaed line.
It i poible to adjut [Direction] by dragging.
M [Shape Preview]
Diplay the preview of pen-tip hape etting.
N [Change Brush Shape Menu]
The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,
and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip hape.
O [Spray Area]
Adjut the range for praying the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on
the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
P [Density]
Adjut the denity of the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on the lefti clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.
Changing of Pattern Brush
select [Change Tool Option setting] from [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option]
window.
・[style(Pattern Bruh): Pen]
A line appear a if drawn by pen.
・[style(Pattern Bruh): Airbruh]
Thi allow the uer to draw a if
with airbruh.
・[style(Pattern Bruh): stamp]
A continuou tamp pattern can be
drawn.
・[style(Pattern Bruh): Ribbon]
The pattern change and a natural
pattern can be drawn.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 92/415
Manga Studio
92
Viewing of [Change Brush Shape Menu] Viewing of [Manage Pattern Materials] Window
A [Pattern Materials Collection] menu
select the category of pattern from the collection. If [Fixed Format] i elected,
it i poible to elect from [Circle]/[square]/[Polygon] in a imilar way to the
[Pen] tool.
B [Control Pattern Materials] button
The [Manage Pattern Material] window i diplayed.
C [Show Menu]
Diplay menu icon.
D [Repeat Type]
When an option other than [Fixed Format] i elected for the [Pattern Material
Collection] menu, the [Repeat Type] control i diplayed. The uer then elect
from the option lited below:
single Ue only the elected pattern.
Multiple(Repeat) Ue all diplayed pattern material repeatedly.
Multiple(Random) Ue all diplayed pattern material randomly.
・[Multibruh]
When [Multiple (Repeat)], or [Multiple (Repeat Randomly)] i elected, multiple
pattern can be drawn all at once.
A [Default User Materials Collection] menu
select the default pattern material collection. If the uer elect the aved
pattern material collection, it become poible to replace with other patternmaterial collection or material.
B [User Materials Collection] menu
select the category of pattern material aved by uer. It can be ued to delete
pattern and change name.
C [Show Menu]
Diplay the ave pattern menu.
D [Delete Pattern] button
Delete the elected pattern.
E [Add to User Materials Collection] buttonAdd the elected pattern to another material collection.
Pattern cannot be added to the default "Pattern Material Collection".
A DCB
E
E
CDCBCA
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 93/415
User Guide
93
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
Eyedropper Tool (EX only)
A color can be matched/acquired from a preexiting image.
The color i acquired in [Drawing Color] of the [Tool] palette.
When the tone layer i clicked with the [Eyedropper] tool, the [Tone] can be
acquired a [Tone Color] in the [Tool] window. For [Tone Color], refer to "Acquire
Tone"( ⇒ p. 206).
Application Operation
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Revere Layer][Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
A [Browse Destination]
select the target layer.
・[Edit Layer]
Browe the layer that i targeted for editing in the [Layer] window.
・[Top Layer]
Browe the top layer among the layer in which the clicked poition i not
tranparent.
・[Image on Display]
Regardle of the layer, the color that i diplayed on creen i acquired a it i.
B [Average of periphery~mm]
Acquire the color of the average value of the pecified area.
C [Convert Color to Opacity and Acquire]
Acquire by converting the color to opacity.
D [Get Tone of Cl icked Position](EX only)
Acquire the tone of the clicked poition.
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Eyedropper
Tool Option] window i diplayed.
A
B
C
D
1. Open the Page
Open the image page with the deired color through [Page Number] tab of the
[Edit] window.
Operation Method
select the layer of target image, and match the color by clicking.
4. Acquire Color
Click on the area where color i to be acquired from.
3. Select the Tool
select the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] window.
2. Select the Layer
Diplay the [Layer] window, and elect the target layer.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 94/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 95/415
User Guide
95
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Fill Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Browse Several]Target multiple layer. select from [All Layer], [selected Layer], and [Layer in
Folder].
E [Sketch]
Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater
layer, [selection Layer] and [Gridline Ruler Layer] with the [sketch] attribute
will not be targeted for filling.
F [Text]
When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not
be targeted for filling.
G [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)
Fill until the vector' center line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.
H [Close Gap] (EX only)
Fill by cloing gap of the pecified pixel.
I
F
J
K
L
M
E
G
H
A
B C
D
[Fill Until Center Line: Before Execution] [Fill Until Center Line: After Execution]
I [Color Tolerance]
specifie the tolerance of the color in ame area.
J [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the filling.
K [Do Not Change Alpha] (32-bit only)
Fill without changing the opacity of the image.
L [Expand/Reduce Area]Fill by expanding or reducing the elected pixel.
M [Add Adjoining Pixels]
Fill by tracing adjacent pixel. If turned off, the ame color within the layer will
all be filled.
[Cloe Path: Before Execution]
[Cloe Path: Off/After Execution] [Cloe Path: On/After Execution]
[Add Adjoining Pixel: Off/After Execution] [Add Adjoining Pixel: On/After Execution]
N [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)
Fill the border area of filling at a denity adjuted with the anti-aliaing of line.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 96/415
Manga Studio
96
It i ued to fill a picture formed by multiple cloed area (area encloed by line)
in a ingle operation.
It i mot appropriate for coloring mall, hard-to-fill area uch a a 1-dot line or a
hair tip that make filling difficult.
4. Fill
The pecified range i filled.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Operation MethodFill by pecifying the Effect Range. Create a layer if neceary.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Fill Cloed Area] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Specify range
select the Effect Range tool from the [CloeFill Tool Option] window, and
pecify the cloed area to be filled.
Fill Closed Area Tool (EX only)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 97/415
User Guide
97
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
K [Text]When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not
be targeted for filling
L [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)
Fill until the vector' center line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.
M [Close Gap]
Fill by cloing gap of a pecified width.
N [Color Tolerance]
specifie the Allowable Error in Color when pecifying cloed area.
[Conform to Panel Borders]
When checked, only the area inide [Panel Folder] border will be elected for
filling. Thi option i only effective when a [Panel Folder] or a layer within a
[Panel Folder] i elected on the Layer palette.
O [Target Color]
set the pecified color to browing detination. The target color conit
of [Target all Color], [Draw in Tranparent Area only], [Draw in other thanTranparent Area], [Do not Change Alpha], [Draw in Black Area Only], [Draw in
Non-black Area], and [Draw in White/Tranparent Area Only].
P [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the filling.
Q [Expand/Reduce Area]
Expand or reduce the filling area by the pecified width.
A cloed area i an area encloed by line. The drawing color of the line can alo
have a mixture of black and white.
Explanation
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [CloeFill Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D Effect Extension
The Effect Range can be elected from among [Pen ● ], [Pen ■ ], [Rectangle],
[Polyline], and [Lao].
E [Size]
Adjut pen width.
F [Reflect Pen Pressure on Size]
Thi make the preure of the pen on the tablet be reflected on the ize.
G [Use size as the value on screen]
Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the drawing i done
with the ize in [size Preview].
H [Size Preview]
Diplay a preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the
preview i dragged.
I [Browse Several]
Target the pecified layer. selection i made from [All Layer], [selected
Layer], and [Layer in Folder].
J [Sketch]Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater
layer, [selection Layer] and [Gridline Ruler Layer] with the [sketch] attribute
will not be targeted for filling.
I
F
J
L
M
N
E
G
H
A BC
D
P
Q
O
K
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 98/415
Manga Studio
98
Line ToolDraw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
When drawing a line while holding down the [shift] key, the line i drawn at every
angle pecified in the [Pen Tool Option] window.
Application Operation
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[selection Layer][Making Layer ]
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer [Panel Ruler Layer]
Curve ToolAfter determining the poition of both end by dragging, adjut the curve. Create
a layer if neceary.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Making Layer ]
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer [Panel Ruler Layer]
Operation Method
Create a layer and draw.
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Curve] tool.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Draw
Dragging on the page draw a line. 3. Draw
On the page, drag from the tarting point to the end point.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 99/415
User Guide
99
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
When dragged while holding down the [shift] key, a line i drawn every 45 degree.
.
Application Operation
Move the curor in the direction of deired curvature.
Clicking confirm it, and the curve i fixated and drawn.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 100/415
Manga Studio
100
Polyline ToolMultiple line can be drawn through moue click. Draw by creating a layer if
neceary.
Operation Method
Create a layer and draw.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
Hold down the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Polyline] tool.
3. Draw
Click the tarting point on the page.
When a econd point i clicked, a line i drawn in between.
Click on a third point.
A line i formed between it and the econd point.
Click on a fourth point. With each click, the clicked poition become a peak and
polyline i formed.
Double-clicking end the drawing, and that poition become the end point of the
polyline.
If the [Enter] key i preed during creation, the polyline i drawn to the poition
clicked upon immediately before.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer][selection Layer]
[Making Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer None
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 101/415
User Guide
101
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
・When drawing with the [shift] key held down, a line can be drawn at an angle
pecified in the [Pen Tool Option] window.
・Right-clicking or preing the [Ec] key while drawing cancel the angle
determined immediately before.
Application Operation
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Polyline Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options (Line/Curve/Polyline)
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Draw Figure]
Draw normally.
E [Create Ruler]
Create a ub ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer]. For [sub Ruler Layer], refer to
"Ruler Layer Type" ( ⇒ p. 109).
F [Draw Line Along Ruler]
Draw a line and create [sub Ruler] to [sub Ruler Layer] at the ame time.
G [Create Panel]
Create a panel folder in the figure. ([Polyline] tool only)
H [Sharpen Angle]
sharpen the line angle. ([Polyline] tool only)
I [Fill Inside Figure]
Fill the cloed area with the pecified color. ([Polyline] tool only)
J [Curve]
Turn the polyline into an incribed curve. ([Polyline] tool only)
K [Size]
Adjut the line width.
R
P
I
J
K
L
M
E F
N
Q
A B
C
D
U
V
O
G H
S
T
W
L [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line.
M [Stroke-in]
Turn [In] on/off, and adjut the intenity.
N [Stroke-out]
Turn [Out] on/off, and adjut the intenity.
O [Vector Snap] (EX only)
Thi make the application of each drawing tool to be aborbed by the already
drawn line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.
P [Size Preview]
Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The etting can be adjuted even if
the preview i dragged.
Q [Thickness]
Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip.
R
[Direction]Adjut the direction of the pen-tip.
S [Fix Direction]
Fixe the direction of pen tip.
T [Anti-Aliasing]
For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, draw an anti-aliaed line.
U [Shape Preview]
Diplay the preview of pen-tip etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction] by
dragging.
V
[Change Brush Shape Menu]The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,
and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip.
W [Fix Every]
Draw a line at each pecified angle.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 102/415
Manga Studio
102
Rectangle, Ellipse, and Polygon ToolsIt i poible to draw rectangle, ellipe, and polygon.
Operation Method
Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the tool from the [Tool] window. Here, the [Rectangle] tool i elected.
For the [Ellipe] tool or [Polygon] tool, elect by right-clicking the [Rectangle] tool.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[selection Layer][Making Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
None
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]switche the tool type.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting
can be aved.
D [Draw Figure]
Draw normally.
E [Create Ruler]
Create a ub ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer]. For [sub Ruler Layer], refer to
"Ruler Layer Type"( ⇒ p. 109).
F [Draw Line Along Ruler]
Draw the figure and create [sub Ruler] to [sub Ruler Layer] at the ame time.
G [Create Panel]
Create a panel folder in the figure.
H [Sharpen Angle]
Thi make harpen the angle of the figure.
I [Fill Inside Figure]
Fill inide the figure with color.
J [Size]
Adjut the line width.
When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Polygon Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options (Rectangle/Ellipse/Polygon)
Q
N
I
J
K
L
E F
M
P
A B
C
D
S
T
O
G H
R
U
V
W
Releaing the moue button complete the drawing.
3. Draw
Dragging on the page expand the figure diagonally.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 103/415
User Guide
103
C h a p t e r
3
D r a wi n g
K [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity of the line.
L [Sides] (Polygon tool only)
specifie the number of ide for the polygon.
M [Vector Snap] (EX only)
Thi make the application of each figure tool to be aborbed by the already
drawn line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.
N [Size Preview]
Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the
preview i dragged.
O [Thickness]
Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip.
P [Direction]
Adjut the direction of the pen-tip.
Q
[Fix Direction]Fixe the direction of pen tip.
R [Anti-Aliasing](EX only)
For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, draw an anti-aliaed line.
S [Shape Preview]
Diplay a preview of pen-tip hape etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction]
by dragging.
T [Change Brush Shape Menu] button
The [Circle]/[square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,
and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip hape.
U [Start from Center]
start drawing the figure from the center.
V [Fix Aspect Ratio]
Fixe the apect ratio of the figure.
W [Rotate after confirming size]
Rotate after confirming the ize of the figure.
・When tarting to create by holding down the [Ctrl] key, the hape begin from
the center.
・When the [shift] key i preed while dragging, the apect ratio i fixed by the
value et in the [Pen Tool Option] window.
・If [Rotate After size i Decided] of the [Pen Tool Option] window i elected,
and [Rotate Every ~ °] i not elected, and the [shift] key i preed during the
rotation, the rotation i at the pecified angle.
Application Operation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 104/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 105/415
Rulers
Chapter 4
This chapter will introduce ruler creation, perspective with rulers, frame layout and more.
Step:01 Ruler 108
Step:02 Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only) 117
Step:03 special Ruler (EX only) 123
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Step:04 symmetry Ruler (EX only) 130
Step:05 Panel Ruler 133
Step:06 Edit・Align Ruler 139
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 106/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 107/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 108/415
Manga Studio
108
Creation Method 1: Using the [Ruler Layer]
If uing the [Ruler Layer] to create a ruler, ue the method below.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
2
1
1 select [Ruler Layer] from [Type].
2 Click the [OK] button.
3 select the created [Ruler Layer].
[Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.
3
[Sub Ruler Layer] + [Draw Lines Along the Ruler]
When you create a [sub Ruler], drawing line will be created at the ame time.
Thi only affect one Image Layer.
Pro
Creation of the ruler and drawing of line art can be done
imultaneouly. When you move or tranform the [sub Ruler],
the line art will be tranformed accordingly.
ConCannot be applied to multiple layer. Cannot delete jut one
part of the line art.
2. Create the Layer
Click the [New Ruler Layer] button in the [Ruler] category of the [Layer] window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 109/415
User Guide
109
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
3. Create a Ruler
On the [Ruler Layer], drawing with the [straight Line], [Curved Line], [Polyline],
[Create Path], [Rectangle], [Ellipe] or [Polygon] drawing tool will create a ruler.
see [Drawing] (P. 67) for more detail about the Drawing Tool.
4. Enable Snap
1 select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.
1
5. Select the Drawing Layer
select the Image Layer where you want to ue the ruler and draw.
3
6. Drawing with the Ruler
Bring drawing tool like [Pen]・[Pencil] or [Magic Marker Marker] cloe to the
ruler and they will be aborbed (napped) to the ruler.
2 select [set snap Point] → [Ruler] in the [View] menu. [Ruler] will be checked.
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 110/415
Manga Studio
110
Creation Method 2: Using the [Sub Ruler Layer]
If uing the [sub Ruler Layer] to create a ruler, ue the method below.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
4
3
3 select [(Ruler)](sub Ruler Layer)] from [Type].
4 Click the [OK] button.
[sub Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.
1 select the Image Layer.
2 Click on the Create [New Image Layer] button in the [Image] category.
1
2
3. Create a Ruler
On the [sub Ruler Layer], drawing with the [straight Line], [Curved Line],
[Polyline], [Create Path], [Rectangle], [Ellipe] or [Polygon] tool create a ruler.
see [Drawing] (P. 67) for more detail about the Drawing Tool.
4. Enable Snap
1 select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.
2 [set snap Point] → [Ruler] in the [View] menu. [Ruler] will be checked.
2
1
5. Select the Drawing Layer
select the Image Layer where you want the sub Ruler.
2. Create the Layer
Open the [Layer] window.
6. Drawing with the Ruler
Bring drawing tool like [Pen]・[Pencil] or [Magic Marker Marker] cloe to theruler and they will be aborbed (napped) to the ruler.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 111/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 112/415
Manga Studio
112
Object Selector ToolWhen electing a ruler on the [Ruler Layer] to move and edit, 、ue the [Object
selector] tool.
How to Use
Drag or click to elect the ruler.
1. Open the Page
Open the page created by the ruler through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Ruler selection] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Select the Ruler
With the [Ruler selection] tool, elect the ruler by dragging or clicking.
The elected ruler will become red.
Viewing of Tool Options
When the [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Ruler selection
Tool Option] window i diplayed.
A [Set All Layers As Target]
select the ruler from all layer.
B [Select Entire Ruler]
selecting any part of the ruler will elect the whole ruler.
C [Add Vertex To Clicked Side]
A control point will be added where you click.
D [Match Other Vertices When Shifting Vectors]
Horizontally or vertically align other vertex point. Thi can only be ued on the
Panel Ruler Layer. see [step:05 Panel Ruler] (P. 133) for more detail about the
Panel Ruler.
E [Snap to Rulers]
Guide Line nap to the Meaurement scale when creating or moving them within
the nap interval. see [show Guide] (P. 364) for more detail about Guide Line.
E
A
B
C
D
・ Hitting the [Ctrl] key while uing a drawing tool like the [Pen] will temporarily
witch it to the [Ruler selection] tool.
・ While holding down the [shift] key, dragging or clicking will allow you to elect
multiple ruler and point on ruler.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 113/415
User Guide
113
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Ruler Operations
You can ue ruler with the keyboard or [Ruler Manipulator]. Move, rotate, enlarge,
and cale are available for diplayed ruler. When wanting to operate on a pecific
ruler, elect with the [Ruler selection] tool.
Using the KeyboardYou can operate the ruler with the keyboard.
1. Display the Ruler You Want To Use
Diplay the layer with the ruler you want edit.
2. Adjust the Center
Rotate and cale alway operate around the center. Move the center point
marked with a [+] with the [Ruler selection] tool or place the moue curor
where you want the center to be and pre the [Q] key.
3. Move, Rotate, ScaleBelow are the key combination for move, rotate and enlarge.
Moving the Ruler [ ← ][ → ][ ↑ ][ ↓ ]
Enlarging the Ruler [Z]
shrinking the ruler [X]
Rotating the Ruler Left [A]
Rotating the Ruler Right [s]
You can change the caling factor for each key pre by electing [Preference] →
[Page] → [Ruler] from the [File] menu. From [Key Control], you can et up [Vertical
Move]・[Horizontal Move]・[Rotate Volume]・[scale].
Application
Using the Ruler Manipulator
Ue the [Ruler Manipulator] to operate ruler.
1. Display the Ruler Manipulator
select [show Page Ruler Manipulator] from the [View] menu to diplay the
[Ruler Manipulator].
2. Adjust the Center
Rotate and cale alway operate around the center. Move the center point
marked with a [+] with the [Ruler selection] tool or place the moue curor
where you want the center to be and pre the [Q] key.
A
B A
B
DE
F
A
B
C
A
B
Movement Relativeto the screen
Click A to move the ruler on top ofthe image.
Movement Relativeto the Paper Click B
to move the ruler accordingto the direction of the paper.Rotating the diplay creenalo rotate thee arrow.
Free Move Drag B to freely move the ruler.
Rotate Clockwie Click C to rotate the ruler left aroundthe center point.
Ro t a t e C oun t e r -Clockwie
Click D to rotate the ruler right aroundthe center point.
Free Rotate Drag C or Dto freely rotate the ruler.
Enlarge Click E to enlarge the ruler aroundthe center point.
shrink Click F to hrink the ruler around thecenter point.
Free scale Drag E or F to freely cale the ruler.
3. Operating the Ruler Diplay the ruler you want to ue and ue the manipulator on it.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 114/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 115/415
User Guide
115
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Manga Studio
Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only)02
You can create a ruler with a Bezier curve. After creating a ruler, you can freely transform it or operate on it again by clicking.
Concept
With the Bezier curve ruler, you can hape the curve by adjuting the angle and length
of control point. Thi allow you to make beautiful curve that would otherwie
be difficult freehand.
A Control Point
Point ticking out of the line that allow you to adjut the curvature.
B Anchor Point
start and end point on the curve.
Bezier Curve Ruler BasicsIntroducing the concept of the Bezier Curve Ruler.
[Uage Example: Pen in a you like along the path]
[Uage Example: Create a path]
A
B
B
A
About PointsRuler have control point and anchor point.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 116/415
Manga Studio
116
Create Path Tool (EX only)The [Create Path] tool i ued to create a Bezier Curve Ruler.
supported layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer][Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
Non-upported [Panel Ruler Layer]
3
4
3 Click and define a control point near the tart point.
4 Click and define a control point near the end point. Upon doing o, a Bezier
curve will be created.
5. Create the Second Curved Line
1 Click and define the end point of the econd curve. Upon defining the end
point, a traight line will be created and you be able to define 1 control point.
2 Click and define a control point.
3 Double click and a Bezier curve ruler will be created.
1
2
3
・Hitting the [Enter] key will make the point you jut defined into the end point to
create a curve.
・Right clicking or hitting the [Ec] key will cancel the point you jut defined.
・For the econd curve, the firt control point i already et, o you only need to
define 1 more point.
Note・Usage
Creation Method 1: Create a Continued Curve
Create a curved line.
1. Open the [Edit] Window
Open the [Page] tab through the [Edit] window.
4. Create the First Curved Line
1
2
1 Click and define the tart point.
2 Click and define the end point. Upon defining the end point, a traight line will
be created with 2 control point.
3. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Create Path] tool.
2. Select the Layer
Create [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 117/415
User Guide
117
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Creation Method 2: Create a Curve with a Corner
Create a curve with harp angle. A part with harp angle will be called a
[Corner].
1. Create the First Curved Line
1
2
1 Click and define the tart point.
2 While holding down the [Alt] key, click and define the end point. Upon defining the
end point, a traight line will be created and you be able to define 2 control point.
3
4
3 Click and define a control point near the tart point.
4 Click and define a control point near the end point. Upon doing o, a [Corner]
will be created.
2. Create the Second Curved Line
12
1 Click and define the end point. Upon doing o, the curve will be kinked and
you be able to define 2 control point.
2 Click and define control point near the tart and end point.
3
3 Upon doing o, Bezier curve ruler with harp angle will be created.
・ After defining the end point, clicking on a control point far away from the tart
point and then hitting the [Alt] key will alo make a [Corner].・ When you want to change the [Corner] tatu of anchor point, you can do o
with [Change Angle statu of selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu. For more
detail, refer to "Change Corner statu of selected Point" (P. 134).
Usage・Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 118/415
Manga Studio
118
Creation Method 3: Create a Closed Curve
Create a cloed curve.
1 Click and define the tart point.
2 Click and define the end point.
1. Tool Options Setup
Diplay the [Create Path Tool Option] window and check [Cloe Curve] in the
[Create Path] tool.
2. Create a closed curve.
3 Click and define the firt control point.
1
2
3
4 Click and define the econd control point. Adjut the hape and double click to
complete.
4
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 119/415
User Guide
119
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Adjust Method 1: Adjust by Control Point
You can change a curve by dragging a control point with the [Ruler selection] tool.
Thi will ymmetrically move the anchor point between the control point. Thi i
poible when the anchor point i not a corner.
Adjust Method 2: Adjust by Anchor Point
You can change a curve by dragging an anchor point with the [Ruler selection]
tool. Thi will move the control point on either ide of the anchor point.
For more detail about anchor point and control point, refer to "Edit・Align
Ruler" (P. 139).
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 120/415
Manga Studio
120
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Create Path Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
A [Drawing Tool Menu]
switche the drawing tool.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
save etting more.
D [Create Ruler]
Create a ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer].
E [Draw Lines Along the Ruler]
Create a ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer] and draw accompanying line
imultaneouly.
F [Sharpen Corners]
sharpen corner of line.
G [Fill In Figure]
Fill in a cloed area with color.
H [Close Curve]
Connect the tart and end point and cloe the curve.
I [Size]
Adjut the thickne of the pen tip.
J [Stroke-in]
Adjut the intenity of the tart of a line by turning it On・Off.
K
[Stroke-out]Adjut the intenity of the end of a line by turning it On・Off.
[Drag to Set]
When checked, you can create a Bezier curve by dragging.
L [Size Preview]
Preview of [size] etting.
Can be adjuted even if the preview i dragged.
G H
I
J
K
D E F
L
CA B
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 121/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 122/415
Manga Studio
122
4. Enable Snap
select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.
set [snap to] → [Perpective] in the [View Menu]. [Perpective] will be checked.
1. Select the Layer
select [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
How to Create
2. Create the Perspective Ruler
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New Perpective Ruler (1 Point Perpective)],
[New Perpective Ruler (2 Point Perpective)] or [New Perpective Ruler (3 Point
Perpective)] from [New special Ruler]. For thi example, [New Perpective Ruler (3
Point Perpective)] i elected.
3. Ruler Selection Tool Adjust
You can adjut the perpective by dragging with the [Ruler selection] tool.
A Guide Line
Reference when drawing with ruler, extending from the vanihing point. It i
poible to rotate around the vanihing point by dragging.
B Center Point
Thi point i the center when moving the guide handle. It poition on the
guide line can be moved with the guide handle.
C Guide Handle
Point on both ide of the center point. It i poible to rotate around the
center point by dragging.
D Vanishing Point
Point of reference for perpective. It i poible to rotate around the center
point by dragging.
A
D
C
B
After creating a ruler on the [Ruler Layer], you can draw line along the ruler on
the image layer.
5. Drawing with the Perspective Ruler
When drawing on the image layer, the angle of the vanihing point and the
guide line allow the pen to be aborbed (napped) radially, o you can draw
with perpective.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 123/415
User Guide
123
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Perspective Ruler Settings
When uing the [Perpective Ruler], thi etting allow you to chooe from 1 to 3
point perpective. Alo allow you to change etting, including helper line.
1. Perspective Ruler Settings
To diplay [Perpective Ruler] etting, right click on helper line or the vanihing
point with the [Ruler selection Tool].
・[set To Infinite]
Intead of making line go to a vanihing point, ue them a parallel line.
・[Diabling snap]
Diable nap.
・[Fix Poition Of Thi Vanihing Point]
Fix the poition of the elected vanihing point.
・[Fix Eye Level to Horizontal]
Thi function like the old [Fix Eye Level] option. Eye level will remain at the
horizontal even if you move vanihing point.
・[Fix Eye Level at Current Poition]
Eye level will remain at the current poition even if you move vanihing point.
・[One-point Perpective]
Enable 1 point perpective.
・[Two-point Perpective]
Enable 2 point perpective.
・[Three-point Perpective]
Enable 3 point perpective.
・[Perpective Ruler Detailed setting...]
Diplay the [Perpective setting] window and configure the helper line.
2. Perspective Settings
setting for guide line and helper line.
A [Hand]
Move the creen.
B [Click to Add Vanihing Point]
A vanihing point will be added where you click.
C [Click to Add Guide Line for Vanihing Point]
A guide line for a vanihing point will be added where you click.
D [Delete selected Point]
Delete the elected vanihing point.
・[show Auxiliary Line(V)]
Diplay helper line that extend toward the vanihing point.
・[Auxiliary Line Color]
set the color of the helper line.
・[Line Interval(D)]set the interval of the helper line.
・[Apply setting To All Vanihing Point]
Apply to all vanihing point, even thoe not currently in ue.
A B C D
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 124/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 125/415
User Guide
125
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Radial Curve Ruler (EX only)You can create curved peed line uch a focu line with thi ruler.
How to Create
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Curved speed Line
Ruler].
6. Drawing with the Curved Speed Lines Ruler
Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) radially,
allowing you to draw curved line from the center.
1. Select the Layer
select [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
2. Create the Curved Speed Lines Ruler
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Curved speed
Line Ruler].
A [Curved speed Line Ruler] will be created.
5. Enable Snapselect [snap] from the [View Menu]. [snap] will be checked.
set [snap to] → [Curved speed Line] in the [View] menu. [Curved speed
Line] will be checked.
3. Set Center
select the center of the [Curved speed Line Ruler] and drag to where deired
with the [Ruler selection] tool.
4. Adjust Control Points
By dragging the control point and turning the guide line, you can et the
curve of the [speed Line Ruler].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 126/415
Manga Studio
126
Parallel Lines Ruler (EX only)You can create parallel line uch a peed line with thi ruler.
How to Create
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Parallel Line Ruler].
4. Enable Snap
select [snap] from the [View Menu]. [snap] will be checked.
set [snap to] → [Parallel Line] in the [View] menu. [Parallel Line] will be checked.
1. Select the Layer
select [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
2. Create the Parallel Lines Ruler
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Parallel Line Ruler].
A [Parallel Line Ruler] will be created.
3. Adjust Angle
Adjut the angle of the [Parallel Line Ruler] by electing with the [Ruler
selection] tool.
5. Drawing with the Parallel Lines Ruler
Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) o that it i
parallel to the guide line, allowing you to draw traight line.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 127/415
User Guide
127
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Concentric Circle Ruler (EX only)You can create concentric circle with thi ruler.
How to Create
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler]→ [Create Concentric Circle Ruler].
4. Enable Snap
select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.
set [snap to] → [Concentric Circle] in the [View] menu. [Concentric Circle]will be checked.
1. Select the Layer
select [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
2. Create the Concentric Circle Ruler
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Concentric Circle
Ruler].
A [Concentric Circle Ruler] will be created.
3. Adjust Shape
Adjut the poition, direction and hape of the [Concentric Circle Ruler] by
dragging with the [Ruler selection] tool.
5. Drawing with the Concentric Circle Ruler
Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) in concentric
circle, allowing you to draw circular line.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 128/415
Manga Studio
128
Manga Studio
Symmetry Ruler (EX only)04
This ruler is used to draw symmetric shapes.
Types of Symmetric Rulers
The different type of symmetric Ruler are lited below.
Symmetry Ruler basics (EX only)
[Line Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to ymmetrically draw thing imultaneouly.
[2-axis Symmetry Ruler]
Centering around 2 ruler, allow you to ymmetrically draw thing imultaneouly.
[2-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 2 place at the
ame time.
[3-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 3 place at the
ame time.
[4-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 4 point at the
ame time.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 129/415
User Guide
129
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
[5-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 5 place at the
ame time.
[6-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 6 place at the
ame time.
[8-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 8 place at the
ame time.
[12-point Symmetry Ruler]
Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 12 place at the
ame time.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 130/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 131/415
User Guide
131
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Manga Studio
Panel Ruler05
Efficiently create the panel layout for manga.
Panel Ruler BasicsThe [Panel Ruler] i ued to create panel.
Types of Panel Ruler Layers
Below are the 3 panel creation method.
[Raster + (Panel Ruler)]
Uing the [sub Panel Ruler Layer] aociated with the [Rater Layer], draw the
panel. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 3. 0 and up.
There i no need to raterize the [Panel Ruler Layer].
Even if you move the ruler, the panel will be moved and redrawn accordingly.
You can edit and move the panel of the [Panel Ruler] by electing it with the [Ruler
selection] tool jut like a ruler.
Explanation
The [Rater and Panel Frame Ruler] will automatically redraw the panel frame when
the panel frame ruler ha been edited.
Explanation
[Panel Ruler Layer]Create a panel by raterizing the [Panel Ruler] created by the [Panel Ruler
Layer]. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 2. 0 and up.
・Uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]
・Uing the [Rater and Panel Frame Ruler]
・Uing the [Panel Folder]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 132/415
Manga Studio
132
[Panel Folder]
Ue the [Panel Folder] to create a panel.
switch from the newly created [Panel Ruler] to the [Panel Folder] in the [Panel
Ruler Layer]. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 4. 0 and up.
Making each panel unit into an individual layer allow you to draw in the
panel like a page.
There i no need to raterize the [Panel Ruler Layer]. Even if moved, the panel
for the [Rater Layer] will be moved and redrawn accordingly.
Creation Method 1: Using the [Panel Ruler Layer]How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]
PLEAsE NOTE: The Panel Ruler i alo referred to a Frame Border Ruler in
part of the application.
・[Panel Folder] allow to you import image like photo (while till in page mode)
to create a photo comic.・You can ue panel layout with [Create Panel] or [Panel Folder]. see [Create Panel
Tool] (P. 168) for more detail.
Explanation
1. Create the Layer
Click the [New Ruler Layer] button in the [Ruler] category of the [Layer] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
1 select [Panel Ruler Layer] for [Layer Type].
2 Click the [OK] button.
2
[Panel Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 133/415
User Guide
133
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
2. Edit Panel Ruler
Edit the Panel Ruler. Thi i where the [Panel Ruler Diviion] take place.
Confirm the [Panel Ruler Layer] election. In the cae of multiple [Panel Ruler]
diplay, ue the [Ruler selection] tool to drag and elect the deired ruler.
select [split Panel Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu.
The [split Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.
1
2
1 specify the [Diviion]. The panel will be divided where the check boxe have
been checked and a preview of the reult will be diplayed.
2 Click the [OK] button.
The [Panel Ruler] will divided.
3. Rasterize the Panel Ruler
Confirm that the [Panel Ruler Layer] i elected in the [Layer] window.
select [Change Layer Type Type...] from the [Layer] menu.
The [Convert Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.
1
2
1 select and et the [Draw Panel a 1 Layer] ection.
2 Click the [OK] button.
4. Complete the Panel
The image layer i created and the [Panel Ruler Layer] i complete.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 134/415
Manga Studio
134
2. Edit Panel Ruler
Edit the Panel Ruler. Thi i where the [Panel Ruler Diviion] take place.
Confirm that the [sub Panel Ruler Layer] or the target [Rater Layer] i elected.
In the cae of multiple [Panel Ruler] being diplayed, ue the [Ruler selection] tool
to drag and elect the deired ruler.
select [Panel Ruler Diviion...] from the [Ruler] menu.
The [Panel Ruler Diviion] window will be diplayed.
1
2
1 specify the [Diviion]. The panel will be divided where the boxe have been
checked and a preview of the reult will be diplayed.
2 Click the [OK] button.
3. Complete the Panel
The panel will be divided and the creation proce i complete.
Creation Method 2:Using the [Raster + (Panel Ruler)]
How to create a Panel uing the [Rater Layer] + [sub Panel Ruler Layer].
1. Create the Layer
Click the [New Image Layer] button in the [Image] category of the [Layer] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
1 select [Rater + (Panel Ruler)] for [Layer Type].
2 Click the [OK] button.
2
1
The [Rater Layer] attached to the [Panel Ruler Layer] will be created.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 135/415
User Guide
135
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Creation Method 1: Using the [Panel Folder]
How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Folder].
1. Create the Layer
Follow intruction for "How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]"
up to [Panel Ruler Diviion]. For more detail, refer to "Creation Method 1:
Uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]" (P. 134).
2. Convert the Layer Type
Confirm that [Panel Ruler Layer] i elected from the [Layer] window.
select [Change Layer Type Type...] from the [Layer] menu.
The [Convert Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.
1
2
1 select and et the [Generate Panel Folder] ection.
2 Click the [OK] button.
3. Complete the Panel
Creating a panel with the [Panel Folder] i complete.
・ You can till move and edit with the [Ruler selection] tool after the converting to
[Panel Folder].
・ The Panel Ruler can alo be created by dragging to the Panel Material page of the
Material palette.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 136/415
Manga Studio
136
Panel Ruler Cutter ToolThe [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] i ued to cut the [Panel Ruler] and [Panel Folder].
How to Use
Drag to cut the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder].
1. Open the Page
Open the page with the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder] you want to cut with the
[Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Layer
Diplay the [Panel Ruler] you want to target through the [Layer] window.
3. Select the Tool
select the [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] from the [Tool] window.
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Panel Ruler Cutter
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
・[Horizontal Interval]
set the horizontal interval between panel.
・[Vertical Interval]
set the vertical interval between panel.
・[Panel Width]
set the width of the panel.
・[Lock at 45 Degrees]
Lock the movement of the [Panel Ruler Cutter] tool at 45 degree.
If you want to draw a 1 Line Panel, et the value of [Horizontal Interval] or [VerticalInterval] to 0. 1mm.
Application
4. Cut the Panel Ruler
You can plit the Panel Ruler by uing the [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] and
dragging acro the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder].
Interval Between Panels
A
B
A Horizontal Interval
B Vertical Interval
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 137/415
User Guide
137
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Ruler EditingEdit a ruler with the [Ruler selection] tool. Ruler have the following 2 type of point.
A Control Point
Point ticking out of the curve that allow you to control the curvature.
B Anchor Point
Any point on the line.
A
B
Manga Studio
Edit・Align Rulers06
Change Rulers, Bezier Rulers, Special Rulers and Panel Rulers.
Cut Rulersselecting [Cut Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will cut the elected (uing the
[Ruler selection] tool) ruler to the clipboard.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
Copy Rulers
selecting [Copy Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will copy the elected (uing the
[Ruler selection] tool) ruler to the clipboard.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
Paste Rulers
selecting [Pate Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will pate ruler from the
clipboard.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 138/415
Manga Studio
138
Close Selected Ruler
With the ruler elected, right click and elect [Cloe selected Ruler] from the menu.
Thi will connect the end of the ruler.
Delete Selected Points
With anchor point elected, elect [Delete selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu.
The elected point or aociated line will be deleted.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 139/415
User Guide
139
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Sharpen Selected Vertex Point
With a control point on the curve elected, right click and elect [sharpen selected
Vertex Point] from the menu. Thi will make a harp angle along the control point.
Combine Selected Vertex Points
With 2 end anchor point elected, right click and elect [Combine selected
Vertex Point] from the menu. Thi will connect the the anchor point with a line,
combining the ruler.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
△ × × ×
△ Only when [Curve] i turned on in the [Tool Option] window of the [Curve]
tool・[Ellipe] tool or [Polyline] tool.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 140/415
Manga Studio
140
Change Angle Status of Selected Points (EX only)
With the anchor point of the curve created by the [Create Path] tool elected,
elect [Change Angle statu of selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu. The
continuity of the elected anchor point will be turned off and changed into a
[Corner].
Converely, [Corner] anchor point can have their [Corner] tatu turned off and
become a mooth curve.
A
B
C
The image above illutrate the difference B between [Corner statu] on/off
when C moving anchor point.
Normally, C moving anchor point will affect the other A point ymmetrically,
drawing a mooth curve. B But with the [Corner] tatu turned on, A point
become fixed and B you are able to make a corner.
A
B
C
[Corner statu: Off]
A
B
C
[Corner statu: On]
Separate Selected Vertex Points
With the control point or the ection between the merged anchor point elected,
right click and elect [separate selected Vertex Point]. Thi will eparate the
ruler. If the area between the 2 anchor point i elected, the ection between
them will be deleted.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○ Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
○ ○ ○ ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 141/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 142/415
Manga Studio
142
Expand Panel Ruler (Page Bleed)
Expand the width of the [Panel Ruler] and the page bleed will be proceed.
5. Complete Expand Width
Width expanion for the [Panel Ruler] complete.
1. Open the Edit Window
Open the image of the targeted [Panel Ruler].
The [Expand Panel Ruler...] window will be diplayed.
2. Select the Layer
Diplay the [Image Layer] or [Panel Ruler Layer] attached to the deired [sub
Panel Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.
1 Configure setting.
2
Click the [OK] button.
4. Select the Command
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [Expand Panel Ruler].
3. Select the Panel
select the target [Panel Ruler] with the [Ruler selection] tool.
2
1 When the [Panel Ruler] i elected, the [show Page Ruler Handle] from the [View]
menu will diplay [Ruler Handle] which allow ruler expanion.
By clicking and dragging the arrow, the panel can be enlarged up to the bleed jut
like with the [Expand Panel Ruler].
Application
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
× × × ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 143/415
User Guide
143
C h a p t e r
4
R u l e r s
Merge Two Panel Rulers
You can merge 2 adjacent [Panel Ruler].
1. Open the Page
Open the page diplaying the Panel Ruler through the [Page] tab of the [Edit]
window.
5. Complete Merge
Merging of 2 [Panel Ruler] complete.
3. Select the Panel
select the deired panel with the [Ruler selection] tool.
2. Select the Layer
Diplay the [Image Layer] or [Panel Ruler Layer] attached to the deired [Panel
Ruler] from the [Layer] window.
4. Select the Command
From the [Ruler] menu, elect [Merge Two Panel Ruler].
Horizontalize
With the ruler elected, elect [Horizontalize] from the [Ruler] menu to align the
ruler horizontally.
Align RulersYou can align multiple ruler.
Verticalize
With the ruler elected, elect [Verticalize] from the [Ruler] menu to align the
ruler vertically.
Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler
× × × ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 144/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 145/415
Layers
Chapter 5
This chapter introduces the basic concept of layers, the different types, as well as the operation of the [Layers] window.
Step: 01 Layer 148
Step: 02 Layer Operation 155
Step: 03 Layer Diplay 164
C h a p t e
r 5
L a y e r s
Step: 04 Panel Folder 166
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 146/415
Manga Studio
146
Manga Studio
Layers01
This chapter introduces the basic concept of layers, the different types, as well as layer operation.
Layer Basics
We can think of "layer" a everal tranparencie laid on top of each other. When we look down through thee layer, we ee a ingle, complete image.
In the cae of a digital drawing, each tep of the proce create a new layer that can ubequently be edited. Combining thee layer produce the final image.
Layer are managed uing the [Layer] window. Thi let u change the layer ordering and tranparency a we deire.
The [Layer] window i acceed by electing [Layer] from the [Window] menu.
Concept
[Layer] window
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 147/415
User's Guide
147
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Layer Types
Different type of layer have different function, o we can create image efficiently.
[Image] Category
By uing the [Vanihing Point], [Focu Line], and [speed Line] filter, you can
add your own icon. To edit the [Focu Line Layer] or [speed Line Layer], double-
click the correponding icon.
For detail on the [Vanihing Point], [Focu Line], and [speed Line] filter, ee
"Chapter 9 Filter" on p. 255.
Explanation/Operation
[speed Line Layer]
icon
[Focu Line Layer]
icon
[Vanihing Point Layer]
icon
Furthermore, the [Rater Layer] ha a [Print Attribute]:
・[Finih] attribute
Upon printing or export, all of the output i converted. The [Finih] attribute i
et by electing the [Finih] attribute radio button at [New Layer] creation.
・[sketch] attribute
Upon printing or exporting, all of the output i converted. The [sketch] attribute
i et by electing the [sketch] attribute radio button at [New Layer] creation.
[Rater Layer]
(color 32-bit)
iconExample image
Example image
For an explanation of [New Layer], ee "New Layer" on p. 157.For an explanation of [Export], ee "Chapter 2 step: 05 Export" on p. 52.
For an explanation of [Print], ee "Chapter 2 step: 07 Print" on p. 64.
・[Raster Layer]
Ued to create name, ketche, and pen work in rater (bitmap format image layer).
The color depth can be et to black (1-bit), monochrome (2-bit), graycale
(8-bit), or color (32-bit).
[Rater Layer]
(black 1-bit)
iconExample image
[Rater Layer]
(graycale 8-bit)
iconExample image
[Rater Layer]
(monochrome 2-bit)
iconExample image
Although it i not poible to uehading with [Rater Layer] (black
1-bit), theoretically it only require
half the pace of [Rater Layer]
(monochrome 2-bit).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 148/415
Manga Studio
148
・[Vector Layer] (EX only)
Ued to perform inking in vector format. Unlike the [Rater Layer], drawing
can be done without edge-baed reolution. A a reult, the format of the
line i changed after they are drawn.
The color depth can be et to monochrome (2-bit) or color (32-bit).
Example image
[Vector Layer](monochrome 2-bit)
icon
・[Sketch Layer]
Upon printing or exporting, the output i converted. The [sketch Layer] i et
upon being imported by the [Import] -> [Image File] or [Photohop File...]
function. The original ize i aved, uch that if the ize i ubequently
changed, the image quality doe not degrade.
[Vector Layer] (color
32-bit)
iconExample image
・[Sub Ruler Layer]
[Ruler Layer] i dependent on the image layer.
For an explanation of [sub Ruler Layer], ee "sub Ruler Layer" on p. 109.
Example image
[sub Ruler Layer] icon
・[Sub Panel Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer] i dependent on the image layer.
For an explanation of [sub Panel Ruler Layer], ee "Rater Layer + (Panel
Ruler)" on p. 133.
[sub Panel Ruler Layer] icon
Example image
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 149/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 150/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 151/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 152/415
Manga Studio
152
[Guide] Category
・[Guide Layer]
Ued to manage the guideline that are created when uing a ruler.
For an explanation of guideline, ee "Guide Diplay" on p. 364.
Example image
[Guide Layer]
icon
・[Grid Layer]
Ued to manage gridline on the paper. Only one layer can be created on each page.
For an explanation of grid line, ee "Grid Diplay" on p. 364.
Example image
[Grid Layer]
icon
・[Print guide/Basic frame layer]
Ued to manage the ' print guide and baic frame. Only one layer can be
created on each page.
For an explanation of print guide and baic frame, ee "Diplaying Print
Guide and Baic Frame" on p. 363.
Example image
[Paper] Category
[Print Guide and Baic Frame Layer]
icon
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 153/415
User's Guide
153
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Manga Studio
Using Layers02
Layers are manipulated using the [Layer Select] tool, [Layer Move] tool, and so on.
Layer Select toolThe [Layer select] tool i ued to elect multiple layer image from a page.
Using the tool
1. Display a layer
From the [Layer] window, diplay the layer that you want to elect on the page.
2. Select the tool
From the [Tool] window, elect the [Layer select] tool.
3. Select a layer from the image
On the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window, ue the [Layer select] tool to drag
the image. All of the layer diplayed within the area defined by dragging are
elected.
Viewing the Tool Options
select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu. The [select Layer Tool Option]
window will appear.
・[Zoom display after selection]
Apart from the elected layer, the image ize i halved.
While the image i zoomed, you can ue the curor key to move up and down
among the elected layer and then draw on a layer.
If you pre the [Enter ] key or [Ec] key, the zoom diplay end and the
previou tool again become active.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 154/415
Manga Studio
154
Layer Move ToolThe [Layer Move] tool i ued to move a pecified layer image only.
Using the tool
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect the layer that you wih to move.
2. Select the tool
From the [Tool] window, elect the [Layer Move] tool.
3. Move the image
On the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window, ue the [Layer Move] tool to drag the
image. Only the elected layer image will move.
Viewing the tool options
select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu. The [Move Layer Tool Option]
window will appear.
・[Auto-Select Click Position Layer]
The layer correponding to the clicked poition, a indicated by the drawing
line, i automatically elected.
・[Auto-Select Layer in Selection]
The layer within the drawing line, i automatically elected.
・[Tone Operation]
When you elect [Tone Layer], you can elect [Move Layer], [Move Tone], or
[Rotate Tone] a the operation mode.
For an explanation of tone, ee "Chapter 7 Tone" on p. 197.
・[Add to Actions](EX only)
You can elect either [Poition] or [Move Amount] a the method for adding to
the action function.
For an explanation of action, ee "Chapter 14 step: 03 Action" on p. 380.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 155/415
User's Guide
155
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Creating New LayersThi chapter introduce the creation of a [Rater Layer] ued for drawing.
Using the tool
1. Display the window
Diplay the [Layer] window.
4. Complete layer creation
A new layer i added to the [Layer] window.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect the [New Layer...] command.
3. Make the layer settings
A [New Layer] window will appear.
1 Make the following etting.
・Layer Type: Rater Layer
・Reolution: 600 dpi
・Color Model: Black And White (2 bit)
・Output Attribute: Finih
2 Click [OK].
Selecting LayersWe can elect layer from the [Layer] window.
Selecting Multiple LayersClick [Enable/Diable drawing] in the [Layer] window, and then place a check
mark in the [Enable/Diable Drawing] column. You can now elect multiple layer.
・ You can alo create a [New Layer] with the [Create New Layer] button on the[Layer] window.
・ When you click the Category column of the [Layer] window, the [New Layer]
menu i diplayed. select thi to create a new layer.
・ For an explanation of how to create a [Ruler Layer] and [sub Ruler Layer], ee
"Chapter 4 Ruler" on p. 107.
・ For an explanation of how to create a [Panel Folder], ee "step: 04 Panel
Folder" on p. 166.
・ For an explanation of how to create a [Making Layer], ee "Making Layer"
on p. 252.
・ You can elect multiple layer by holding down the [shift] key and then clicking
the layer to be elected.
・ If you mitakenly include an incorrect layer in your multiple election, click the
[Enable/Diable Drawing] column again uch that the check mark diappear.
Thi clear the election.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 156/415
Manga Studio
156
Layer DuplicationLayer can be duplicated.
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect the layer that you want to duplicate.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect [Duplicate Layer].
3. Completing the duplicationOn the [Layer] window, a layer entitled [Copy of...] i created.
Deleting a LayerLayer can be deleted.
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to delete.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect [Delete Layer].
3. Completing the deletion
The layer i deleted from the [Layer] window.
A layer can be deleted either by clicking the [Delete Layer] button on the [Layer]
window, or by dragging & dropping the layer on the button.
Application
Alo, by dragging & dropping a layer on the [Create a New Layer] button,
a [Duplicate Layer] i created.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 157/415
User's Guide
157
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Converting Layers to a FolderFrom the [Layer] window, create "Layer Folder", and then convert each type of
layer to a folder.
1. Select a layer
Click the [Enable/Diable drawing] column of the [Layer] window, and then electthe layer that you want to organize into one folder.
3. Make the folder settings
A [Group Layer Into Folder] window appear. Make the neceary etting and
then click [OK].
2. Select the commandFrom the [Layer] menu, elect [Group Layer Into Folder].
5. Close the folder
Clicking the triangle to the left of the folder cloe the folder.
4. Completing conversion to a folder
On the [Layer] window, a [Layer Folder] incorporating the elected layer i created.
・ A [Layer Folder] can alo be created by clicking the [Create New Layer Folder]
button on the [Layer] window. In thi cae, an empty folder i created, o
organize the layer into the folder by dragging & dropping.
・ To releae the layer from within a folder, elect the [Layer Folder] and then,
from the [Layer] menu, elect [Clear Folder Converion]. The folder i deleted.
Explanation/Operation
Using the [Group Layer Into Folder] window.
・[Compress When Folder Is Closed]
When the folder i cloed, the content are compreed into a ingle image
preview. Thi can greatly improve your work flow.
The compreion i only applied to the preview, and doe not degrade the data.
・[Set to Panel Folder]
set [Panel Folder] a the folder type.
The area around the image i cropped and the image i then converted to a folder.
For an explanation of a [Panel Folder], ee "step: 04 Panel Folder" on p. 166.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 158/415
Manga Studio
158
Layer Type Change
Method 1: Layer Type Change
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to change.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Change Layer Type] command.
3. Make the layer settings
A [Change Layer Type] window will appear.
1 Uing [Layer Type], et the layer type.
2 Click [OK].
2
1
4. Completing the layer type change
The layer type change i now complete. The layer icon will change according to
the new type of the layer.
The layer type can be changed, by changing the rater ize.
Method 2: Convert raster vector (EX only)
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Change Layer Type] command.
Change a [Rater Layer] to a [Vector Layer].
3. Make the layer settingsA [Change Layer Type] window will appear.
1 For [Layer Type] elect [Vector Layer].
2 select [Vector setting...]
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect [Rater Layer].
Important! A layer cannot be retored once it ha been raterized. When you et
[Preerve Original Layer] to ON in the [Change Layer Type] window, the original
layer will remain even after the layer type ha been changed.
Important!
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 159/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 160/415
Manga Studio
160
Method 3: Change SHD (EX only)
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect a medium-reolution rater layer. Here, weelect a 150-dpi rater layer.
Uing the super High Denity (sHD) function, we can apply the mot appropriate
moothing proceing to enure the reproduction of the original image without
the appearance of jagged edge.
The [sHD] window appear.
5
6
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Change Layer Type] command.
3. Make the layer settings
A [Change Layer Type] window will appear.
1 Check that [Rater Layer] i et for [Layer Type].
2 For [Reolution] elect a reolution that i higher than that of the original layer.
Here, we elect 600 dpi.
3 Place a check mark in the [Ue sHD] check box.
4 Click the [sHD setting...] button.
5 For [Layer Type] elect [Threhold a Reference], [Diffuion], or [Dither].
The [Change Layer Type] window reappear.
7 Click [OK].
6 Click [OK].
4. Completing layer type change
The layer type change i now complete. The layer icon will change according to
the new type of the layer.
Uing the [sHD] filter, a low-reolution image can be enhanced to produce an
image with the equivalent of four time the reolution. If a ketch i canned at
a high reolution of around 600 dpi, then etting 600 dpi in the [sHD] window
will not produce any improvement in the image.
Explanation/Operation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 161/415
User's Guide
161
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Merging LayersMultiple layer can be merged into one.
・ Important! Once layer have been merged, original layer cannot be retored.・ A [Tone Layer] cannot be merged. When raterizing i performed a part of
a merge, note that Moire pattern may appear.
Important!
1. Select a layer
Click [Enable/Diable drawing] in the [Layer] window, and then elect the layer.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Merge Layer...] command.
3. Make the layer settings
A [Merge Layer] window will appear.
1 select a type for the combined layer.
2 Click [OK].
1
4. Completing layer merge
The layer merging i now complete.
Merging Layers
You can merge multiple layer.
Merging Down Layers
From the [Layer] menu, elect [Merging Down Layer]. Only the layer immediately
below i merged.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 162/415
Manga Studio
162
Changing the Order of LayersOn the [Layer] Window, you can change the order of the layer by dragging &
dropping.
Before moving a layer
After moving a layer
Manga Studio
Displaying Layers03
Using the [Layer] Window, you can change the way in which a layer is displayed.
Show/Hide LayerBy clicking the [show/Hide Layer] column of the [Layer] Window, you can witch
between how/hide for the layer.
While an image i diplayed, an icon will appear in the column correponding to
that layer.
(Background foliage) layer: how
(Background foliage) layer: hide
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 163/415
User's Guide
163
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Layer order change, can only be applied to layer having the ame category,
uch a thoe of the [image] category.
Explanation
Displaying the Layer DivisionThe [Layer] window can diplay the layer diviion. When the [Layer] window i
diplaying two layer, moving the curor on the [Diviion Diplay Bar] drag the
uppermot layer down o that the other layer i diplayed.
4. Make the settings with the [Color Settings] dialog
Once the [Color setting] dialog i diplayed, elect a color and then click [OK].
5. The palette color is changed
The color of the [show/Hide Layer] and [Enable/Diable Drawing] column of the
[Layer] window i changed.
Changing the Layer Palette ColorYou can change the color of the [show/Hide Layer] and [Enable/Diable Drawing]
column of the [Layer] window.
1. Select a layer
From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to change.
2. Select the command
From the [Layer] menu, elect [Layer Propertie...].
3. Change the palette color
Once the [Propertie] window i diplayed, double-click the [Palette Color] box.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 164/415
Manga Studio
164
Manga Studio
Panel Folder04
This chapter introduces the basic concept of the panel folder, as well as its operation.
Panel Folder Basics
A "panel folder" i a pecial area (panel) on a page where a layer i made up of
everal layer.
Thi i ueful when you want to group layer together on a panel by panel bai.
When you double-click the [Panel Folder] icon in the [Layer] window, the [Panel]
window open, allowing you to edit the layer within the panel folder.
Concept
Page diplay: [Layer] window
Page diplay: [Page] tab of the [Edit] window
Panel diplay: [Layer] window of the [Panel Folder]
Panel diplay: [Panel Folder]
Within the panel folder, clicking the triangle in the [Layer] window caue the
layer within the panel to expand and, depending on the tatu of the [Page] tab in
the [Edit] window, you can then edit thoe layer.
Application
Thi chapter introduce the baic concept of the panel folder, a well a it operation.
A [Panel Folder] can be created in the following way.
Creation Methods
Uing the [Rectangle]・[Ellipe]・[Polygon]・[Polyline] tool ⇒ P. 167
Uing the [Panel Creation] tool ⇒ P. 168
Making change with the [Panel Ruler] ⇒ P. 137
Making a change from a election ⇒ P. 184
Making a change uing [Convert to Layer Folder] ⇒ P. 159
Uing [Panel] material ⇒ P. 134
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 165/415
User's Guide
165
C h a p t e r
5
L a y e r s
Creation: Figure tool [Panel Creation]
From the figure tool:
1. Open the page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the tool
From the [Tool] window, elect the [Rectangle] tool.
3. Create a [Panel Folder]
Draw a figure uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Diplay the [Rectangle Tool Option] window, and then click the [Create Panel]
button.
The Panel Folder i created.
・ When a [Panel Folder] i created uing the [Create Panel] tool, or changed from
[Panel Ruler], a ruler and [Making Layer] are created at the ame time.
・For an explanation of the [Making Layer], ee "Making Layer" on p. 252.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 166/415
Manga Studio
166
Panel Creation Tool
Ue the [Panel Creation] tool to create a panel folder.
Operation Method
Drag the [Panel Creation] tool over the page.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Panel Ruler Cut] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the
[Panel Creation] tool.
3. Create a Panel Folder
Drag the [Panel Creation] tool over the page to create [Panel Folder].
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Panel Creation Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
・[Specify Resolution and Color Model]
Enable the pecification of reolution and color model.
・[Resolution]
specify the reolution of the panel to be created.
・[Color Model]
specify the color model of the panel to be created.
When the [Diplay layer propertie] icon on the [Layer] window i clicked with a panel
folder elected, a pop-up menu i diplayed and the following operation can be
performed.
・[Convert a Panel Frame to a Layer]
Convert a panel frame to a layer. Thi change the layering
within a Panel Ruler Layer and enable the diplay of word
balloon and other effect on top of the panel frame.
・[show/Hide Panel Frame]show and hide the panel frame.
・[Raterize Panel Frame]
Dicard and raterize the ruler data.
Application Operation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 167/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 168/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 169/415
User Guide
169
C h a p t e r
6
S e l e c t i o n
Color Mode
You can ue 1-bit or 8-bit color mode for a election.
1-bit Selection
Thi can be created with [selection Layer (1-bit)]. Thi create an outline with
harp edge.
8-bit Selection (EX only)
Thi can be created with [selection Layer (8-bit)]. Thi create an outline with
highlighted edge.
An 8-bit election can only be ued with 8-bit or 32-bit [Rater Layer] or 8-bit
[selection Layer]. Additionally an 8-bit election cannot be ued when pating a tone.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 170/415
Manga Studio
170
Rectangle Selection ToolUe the [Rectangle selection] tool to create rectangular election.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
None
Operation Method
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Drag the [Rectangle selection] tool to make a election.
2.Select the Tool
select the [Rectangle selection] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Create the Selection
Drag the tool over the image to create a election hown with a dotted line.
Ellipse Selection ToolUe the [Ellipe selection] tool to create elliptical election.
Operation Method
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Drag the [Ellipe selection] tool to make a election.
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Rectangle selection] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect
the [Ellipe selection] tool.
3. Create the Selection
Drag the tool over the image to create a election hown with a dotted line.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
None
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 171/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 172/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 173/415
User Guide
173
C h a p t e r
6
S e l e c t i o n
Magic Marker Wand ToolUe the [Magic Marker Wand] tool to create ame color area a the election.
Operation Method
Click the [Magic Marker Wand] tool over the image.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2.Select the Tool
select the [Magic Marker Wand] tool from the [Tool] window.
3. Create the Selection
Click the image to create a election hown with a dotted line in the
continuou area of the ame color.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
[Ruler Layer]
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Magic Marker
Wand Tool Option] window i diplayed.
A - H Same as the [Rectangle Selection] tool.
Refer to "Viewing of Tool Option (Rectangle selection/Ellipe
selection/Lao selection/Polyline selection)"( ⇒ P.174).
I [Browse Several]
Target everal layer. select from the following option.
All Layer All diplayed layer
selected Layer Layer elected with the layer window
Layer in Folder Layer in the elected folder
J [Sketch]
Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater
layer, [selection Layer] and [Gridline Ruler Layer] with the [sketch] attribute
will not be targeted for election.
K [Text]When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not
be targeted for election.
L [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)
Fill to the vector center line. Thi i valid only for [Vector Layer].
M [Close Gap] (EX only)
Create a election by cloing a gap of a pecified number of pixel.
N [Color Tolerance]
Configure the allowable error in color when pecifying the election.
O [Expand/Reduce Area]
Expand or reduce the election by a pecified number of pixel.
P [Add Adjoining Pixels]
Create a election by following the ame color at the clicked poition.
Clearing thi check box elect all area with the ame color on the page.
A B
E F G
H
I
M
C
J
D
L
O
P
N
K
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 174/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 175/415
User Guide
175
C h a p t e r
6
S e l e c t i o n
Select from Current Selection
Ue [select from Current selection] on the [Tool Option] window to elect only the
area that i overlapping the currently elected portion.
[select from Current selection]
Uing the election tool while holding down the [shift]+[Alt] key alo enable
[select from Current selection].
Application Operation
select [Cloe Gap] on the [Tool Option] palette to cloe the gap of a pecified
number of pixel and create a election.
Thi can be ued when electing [shrink selection], [Inide selection], [shape
selection], or [Boundary selection] from the [Tool Option] window.
Close Gap (EX only)
[Cloe Gap: Before Execution]
[Cloe Gap: Off/After Execution]
[Cloe Gap: On/After Execution]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 176/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 177/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 178/415
Manga Studio
178
The elected layer can be changed by electing the [Browe several] check box on
the [Tool Option] palette and changing the reference ource from the menu.
Browse Several (EX only)
[All Layer]
[Rectangle selection Tool Option] window
[Magic Marker Wand Tool Option] window
・[Selected Layers]
Target multiple layer elected with the [Layer]
palette and create a election.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 179/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 180/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 181/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 182/415
Manga Studio
182
Blur the Border (EX only)
1. Open the Page
Open the page with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Ue thi to blur the border inide the election.
The election i converted to 8-bit graycale automatically.
2. Select the Command
select [Blur Border] from the [selection] menu.
The [Blur Border] window i diplayed.
3. Blur Process Complete
The border of the election i blurred.
1 specify [Blur Range].
2 Click the [OK] button.
2
Convert Selection to Panel FolderCreate [Panel Folder] from a election.
select [Convert selection to Panel Folder] from the [selection] menu to execute the
command.
Refer to "Chapter 5. step:04 Panel Folder" ( ⇒ p.166) for detail on [Panel
Folder].
Transform Selection
The hape and content of the election can be tranformed.
select the [Move and Tranform] command from the [Edit] menu and execute the
command.
Refer to "Chapter 8. step:03 Move and Tranform"(⇒ p.237) for detail.
Select All
select the entire page.select [select All] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.
Clear Selection
Clear the election.
select [Clear selection] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.
Select Again (EX only)
select the election that wa cleared.
select [select Again] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.
Invert Selection
Invert the election.
select [Invert selection] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.
1
4. Fill the Selection (usage example)
The election with a blurred border i filled.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 183/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 184/415
Manga Studio
184
3. Selection Filling Complete
The election i filled.
・[Drawing Color]
select the fill color. The [Drawing Color] button on the window vary depending
on the layer type.
1 bit select [Black], [Tranparent], or [(Current Drawing Color)].
2 bit select [Black], [White], [Tranparent], or [(Current Drawing Color)].
8 bitUe the graycale lider to elect the graycale value. You can alo
elect [(Current Drawing Color)].
32 bitYou can elect full color and the [Alpha] value. You can alo elect
[Tranparent] or [(Current Drawing Color)].
・[Draw Method]
You can now elect from [Preerve Black Area]・[Draw in Black Area]・[Draw
in White/Tranparent Area].
・[Color Specification] button
set the drawing color with the [Color setting] window. (Thi i valid only for
32-bit [Rater Layer] and [Vector Layer].)
・[Alpha Value]
set the opacity of the drawing color. (Thi i valid only for 32-bit [Rater Layer]
and [Vector Layer].)
・[Drawing Method] (EX only)
select [Fill All], [Protect Tranparent Area], or [Draw in Tranparent Area] for
the filling method.
・[Fill Enclosed Area] (EX only)
Fill only area encloed within the election.
・[Browse Several Layers] (EX only)
Target everal diplayed layer.
All Layer All diplayed layer
selected Layer Layer elected with the layer window
Layer in Folder Layer in the elected folder
・[Do not browse sketch] (EX only)
How to read the [Fill Selection] window
Fill the election in the drawing color currently elected with the [Tool] window.
select [Fill selection in Drawing Color] from the [Edit] menu to execute the
command.
Fill Selection in Drawing Color (EX only)
Remove the layer with the output attribute et to [sketch] from the target.
・[Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)
Fill to the vector center line. (Thi i valid only for [Vector Layer].)
・[Ignore Text]
When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not
be targeted for filling.
・[Gap to Close] (EX only)
When uing, [Fill Encloed Area], cloe the gap between line with a pecified
width and fill that gap.
・[Conform to Panel Borders]
When checked, only the area inide [Panel Folder] border will be elected for
filling. Thi option i only effective when a [Panel Folder] or a layer within a
[Panel Folder] i elected on the Layer palette.
・[Expand] (EX only)
When uing [Fill Encloed Area], et the area to be expanded.
・[Allowable Error in Color] (EX only)When uing [Fill Encloed Area], et the allowable error in color.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 185/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 186/415
Manga Studio
186
Create a election and change the color of line in the image to the color
elected with [Drawing Color] on the [Tool] window.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] window.select [White] from the drawing color on the [Tool] window.
2. Select the Command
select the [Change Line Color to Drawing Color] command from the [Edit] menu.
3. Change Complete
The color of the area that i not tranparent in the election i changed to a white
drawing color.
Change Line Color to the Drawing Color (EX only)
When a election i created, the [selection Launcher] i created and command can
be eaily elected.
A Clear selection Clear the election.
B Expand selection Expand the election. Refer to "Expand
selection"( ⇒ p.182) for detail.
C Reduce selection Reduce the election. Refer to "Reduce
selection"( ⇒ p.182) for detail.
D Clear Clear the content of the election. Refer
to "Clear"( ⇒ p.185) for detail.
E Clear Area Outide selection Clear the content of the area outide the
election. Refer to "Clear Area Outideselection"( ⇒ p.185) for detail.
F Cut and Pate Cut the content inide the election
and pate it into a new layer. Refer to
"Chapter 8. step: 01 Cut and Pate"( ⇒
p.228) for detail on [Cut] and [Pate].
G Copy and Pate Copie the content inide the election
and pate it into a new layer. Refer to
"Chapter 8. step: 01 Copy and Pate"
( ⇒ p.228) for detail on [Copy] and [Pate].
H Move and Tranform Move or tranform the content inide the
election. Refer to "Chapter 8. step: 03 Moveand Tranform"( ⇒ p.237) for detail.
I Fill selection in Drawing Color Fill the election in the drawing color.
Refer to "Fill selection"( ⇒ p.185) for
detail.
J Create New Tone Pate the tone into the content of the
election. Refer to "Operation Method 2:
When Uing the [selection Launcher]"( ⇒
p.201) for detail.
A B E F G H IC JD
Selection Launcher
select [selection Launcher] from the [Diplay] menu to change the [selection
Launcher] diplay.
Application Operation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 187/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 188/415
Manga Studio
188
Selection Layer Operation
Here we will introduce how to ave and import a election uing [selection Layer].
Convert Selection to Layer
You can ave (convert to a layer) an image layer or other election to [selectionLayer]. Click the [Convert selection to Layer] button on the [Layer] window.
2.Selection Conversion Complete
The election i converted and [selection Layer] i created.
1. Create a Selection
Create a election through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
1 select a layer created with [selection] from the [Layer] window.
2 Click the [Convert selection to Layer] button on the [Layer] window.
1
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 189/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 190/415
Manga Studio
190
Draw on the Selection Layer
You can freely draw on a new [selection Layer] and create a election with
a complicated hape.
Click the [Create New Layer] button on the [Layer] window to create a [selection Layer].
When [Black (1 bit)] i elected from the [New Layer] window, a 1-bit [selection
Layer] i created, and when [Gray (8 bit)] i elected, an 8-bit [selection Layer] i
created.
Explanation
2 set a follow.
Type selection Layer
Color Model ・Black (1 bit)
・Gray (8 bit) (EX only)
3 Click the [OK] button.1.
Open
the
Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
1 Click the [Create New Layer] button on the [Layer] window.
The [New Layer] window i diplayed.
1
2. Create the Layer
Diplay the [Layer] window.
3. Draw
[selection Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.
When a drawing tool on the [selection Layer] i ued, the drawn trace become
the aved election.
Convert the aved election to the election from the [selection Layer] a
neceary and ue.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 191/415
User Guide
191
C h a p t e r
6
S e l e c t i o n
You can temporarily layer a election and ue the drawing tool to create, edit and
view a elected image. Thi i ueful for creating a election with a complicated hape.
Ue the [Ue Quick Mak/Cancel Quick Mak] button on the [Layer] window to
how or hide [Quick Mak] mode.
Quick Mask (EX only)
Diplay the [Layer] window.
3. Cancel [Quick Mask] mode.
1 Click [Cancel Quick Mak] on the [Layer] window.
[Quick Mak] i deleted and [selection] i created where Quick Mak wa applied.
1
Ue the drawing tool to draw a election on Quick Mak. If a election ha
already been created, it i drawn a [Quick Mak].
1 Click the [Ue Quick Mak] button on the [Layer] window.
Diplay the [Layer] window.
2. Use [Quick Mask] mode.
1
The mode witche to [Quick Mak] mode.
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
1. Open the Page
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 192/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 193/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 194/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 195/415
Tone
Chapter 7
This chapter introduces tone application. The digital tones handled by Manga Studio are "Manga Studio Format Tones" and
"Computones Format Tones."
Step: 01 Manga studio Format Tone 198
Step: 02 Computone Format Tone (EX only) 220
C h a p t e r
7
T o n e
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 196/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 197/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 198/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 199/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 200/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 201/415
User Guide
201
C h a p t e r
7
T o n e
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Gradation Tool
Option] window i diplayed.
A [Drawing Tools Menu]
The drawing tool can be witched.
B [Tool Settings Menu]
switche the tool etting.
C [Show Menu]
It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the ettingcan be aved.
D [Line Creation Mode]
A traight line gradation i drawn according to the ditance dragged.
E [Circle Creation Mode]
The gradation i drawn according the hape of the ellipe created by dragging.
F [Creation in Circle Mode]
The gradation i drawn in the ellipe created by dragging.
G [Draw On Selected Layer]
Draw gradation in the elected image layer.When off, a new [Tone Layer] i created.
H [Darkness Graph]
Adjut the denity balance of the generated gradation from tart to end point.
Increae the number of point by clicking in the graph, and adjut them by
dragging. It i poible to delete point by dragging them outide the graph.
I [Repeat Type]
switche the repeat type for gradation.
A B
E F
G
H
D
C
I
J
K
[Repetition] Repeat in the ame direction.
[Loop] Repeat in the by changing direction alternately.
[None]The gradation i only the ditance dragged, and the outide
of both end i filled with each color.
J
[Lines]specifie the number of line when creating a gradation.
K [Angle]
specifie the tone angle when creating a gradation.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 202/415
Manga Studio
202
Tone Editing
Erasing Tones
You can erae tone uing [Drawing Color: Tranparent].
1. Open the Page
Open the page with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select [Tone Layer] from the [Layer] window.
2. Select a Tool
select the [Pen] or other drawing tool from the [Tool] window.
select [Drawing Color: Tranparent] from the [Tool] window.
3. Erase tones
Drag the drawing tool over the [Tone Layer] to erae the tone.
・[Pattern Bruh] ha content to erae a portion of the tone.
・Tone can alo be eraed with the [Eraer] tool.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 203/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 204/415
Manga Studio
204
Acquire Tone (EX only)
Ue the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] palette to get the tone in the Drawing Color..
1. Open the Page
Open the page where the tone i applied with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Eyedropper Tool
select the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] window.
Open the [Eyedropper Tool Option] window.
1 select [Top Layer] from [Browe Detination].
2 Check the [Convert Color To Opacity And Acquire] box.
1
2
3. Get the Tone
Click on the tone to obtain with the [Eyedropper] tool.
The tone i obtained to the [Tool] window [Tone Color].
When drawing with [Tone Color], a new [Tone Layer] i created.
The obtained [Tone Color] can even be ued a a drawing color for page or title
that do not have the original [Tone Layer].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 205/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 206/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 207/415
User Guide
207
C h a p t e r
7
T o n e
Moving and Transforming the Tone Area
With the tone pattern remaining fixed, the pated hape (area) can be moved or
changed by itelf.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window. select [Tone Layer]
from the [Layer] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Move and Tranform] from the [Edit] menu, and then elect the
command to be applied from the diplayed menu.
Red guideline are diplayed around the tone, and the [Move and Tranform] tab
of the [Propertie] window i diplayed.
1 When the guideline or quare handle i dragged, tone area tranformation uch
a caling and rotation can be performed.
Refer to "Type of Moving and Tranformation" ( ⇒ p. 239) for the detail on
operation method.
2 When the inner ide of the guideline i dragged, the tone can be moved.
3 Tranformation can be done by inputting numerical value into the [Propertie]
window.
4 Double-click on top of the page, or click the [OK] button of the [Propertie]
window.
3. Tone Area Move and Transform Completes
The Tone Area [Move and Tranform] i complete.
2
1
3
4
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 208/415
Manga Studio
208
Distort Tone Pattern (EX only)
With the tone region remaining fixed, the pattern can be moved or tranformed by itelf.
1. Open the Page
Open the page with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select [Tone Layer] from the [Layer] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Tone Ditort] from the [Edit] menu, and then elect the command to beapplied from the diplayed menu.
Red guideline are diplayed around the tone, and the [Move and Tranform] tab
of the [Propertie] window i diplayed.
3. Distortion Transformation Complete
The movement and tranformation of the tone pattern i completed.
1 When the guideline or quare handle i dragged, tone pattern tranform o that
caling and rotation can be performed in repone to the elected command.
Refer to "Type of Moving and Tranformation"( ⇒ p. 239) for detail on
operation method.
2 When the inner ide of the guideline i dragged, the tone pattern can be moved.
3 Tranformation can be done by inputting numerical value into the [Propertie] window.
4 Double-click on top of the page, or click the [OK] button of the [Propertie] window.
3
4
1
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 209/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 210/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 211/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 212/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 213/415
User Guide
213
C h a p t e r
7
T o n e
Imported image and original pattern can be ued a pattern tone.
[Pattern] Tone
1. Open the Page
Open the page with the deired image uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit]
window. When pecifying an image region, a election i created.
2. Save New Tone
select [save Pattern To Tone Material...] from the [Edit] menu.
The [save Pattern in Tone Material] window i diplayed.
1 select a folder from the [Uer] folder.
If there i no folder, click on the [New Folder...] button in the lower left, create
a tone folder, and then elect it.
2 Click the [OK] button.
A [Pattern] tone i created in the [Material] window. The created tone can be
ued in the ame way a a normal tone.
saving without creating a election i the ame a hrink electing an image.
Notes
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 214/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 215/415
User Guide
215
C h a p t e r
7
T o n e
The following item can be elected when [Gradation] i elected a the [Tone Mode].
Gradation
The following item can be elected when [Background] i elected a the [Tone
[Background] Tone
A [Source Image Preview]
The ource image elected for the [Background] tone i diplayed.
B [Import] Button
Click on thi to diplay the [Open File] window. select the image to ue in the
Background tone.
・[Scale]
set the ize of the [Background] tone image.
・[Brightness]
set the brightne of the [Background] tone image.
・[Contrast]
set the contrat for the [Background] tone image.
・[Optimize At Next Load]
When importing the next page, the unued area are deleted and optimization
i performed.
A
BA
B
A [Shape]
select the gradation hape.
[Line] Generate the gradation in the direction of the line.
[Circle] Generate the gradation in the direction of the circle.
B [Repeat Type]
select the gradation pattern.
[Repetition]Repeat in the ame direction for each ize that i et with
[size].
[Loop]Revere and repeat in the ame direction for each ize
that i et with [size].
[None] Terminate the gradation pattern at the ize et with [size].
・[Ellipticity]
set the flatten rate for the circle. (Only when [Circle] i elected with [shape])
・[Size]
set ditance when repeating the gradation.
For example, when 5. 0 cm i et, the gradation repeat every 5. 0 cm.
・[Darkness Graph]
set denity by dragging the control point. Drag the control point off of the
denity graph to delete it.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 216/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 217/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 218/415
Manga Studio
218
Manga Studio
Computones Format Tones (EX only)02
Computones BasicsThi ection introduce concept and uage.
Concept
Computone i a plug-in that can eaily apply a tone to an original image drawn
on a Manga studio Rater Layer, and verify with a tone brower. For each tartup,
one type of tone can be applied to a ingle [Tone Drawing Area].
Operation MethodOpen the tone brower and pate the tone.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Select the area
specify the area to pate the tone with the election.
The example elect the character' clothing.
Thi elected area i called the [Tone Drawing Area].(If a election i not made, the entire image become the [Tone Drawing Area])
4. Select a Command
select [Filter] Menu → [Computone] → [screen Tone...], in equence.
Click on the [select Tone set] box, and elect
the tone et. select [PT3-600-ALL] here.
The content of the elected 600dpi tone et content
i diplayed a a thumbnail in the [Tone set] are below.
5. Select a Tone Set
The Computone [screen Tone] window i diplayed.
Glossary
Thi ection introduce the term pecific to Computone.
screen Tone
The name of the "Computone for Manga studio"
plug-in.
For each tartup, one type of tone can be applied to
a ingle election (Tone Drawing Area).
Monochrome Tone
Thee tone are compoed of only "Completely
White" and "Completely Black." The Make Pattern
box i unchecked.
Gray ToneThee tone are compoed of 256 color tone
(gradation). The Make Pattern box i checked.
Tone setThi i grouped tone data.
The uer can alo create original tone et.
Tone Drawing Area Thi i the election area where the tone i applied.
Completely White Diplay white of 0% darkne.
Completely Black Diplay black of 100% darkne.
2. Select Layers
With the [Layer] window, elect the [Rater Layer] (1bit/2bit/8bit) to pate the tone.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer X - X
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 219/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 220/415
Manga Studio
220
Description of Computones Functions"Computone" ([screen Tone] filter) are applied in image up to the et election. If there i no election, it i applied to the entire page. For normal ue, we recommend
pecifying the location where you want to pate the tone a the election.
A Title BarImage size・Image Mode diplayed.
B
Window FrameThe ize of the window can be changed by dragging.
With Window the entire frame can be reized.
C [Preview] AreaThi area diplay the execution proce and reult
of "Computone" function.
A croll bar i on the right and bottom, and the
diplay content can be crolled.
D [Filter Settings] information AreaThe [Title]/[Line]/[Denity]/[size] data for the
elected tone i diplayed.
(When the window i mall, not all data can be
diplayed)
E [Preview Display Mode] ButtonBy witching on/off, elect whether to diplay
only the layer where the tone i applied (off) or to
cacade all diplayable layer (on). Although the
tone i hown on top regardle of the elected
layer, it i applied to the original layer' poition
after [OK].
F [Preview Display Ratio] BoxThe magnification of the image hown in the
[Preview] area can be changed.
The magnification can be elected from 13 level of
5. 0% ~ 800. 0%, jut a the [Zoom] tool.
Thi function only change the diplay magnification
and doe not influence the tone ize.
G [Image Resolution] AreaThe reolution (document ize) of the image hown
in the [Preview] i diplayed unit of dpi.
H [Hand Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Hand] tool, and the
content diplayed in the [Preview] area can be
moved by dragging.
Thi kind of diplay poition operation can alo
move the [Preview] area croll bar.
Different from the [Move] tool, pated tone and
pin can be moved.
I [Move Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Move] tool, and the
poition where tone are pated and pin diplayed
in the [Preview] area can be moved imultaneouly
by dragging.
Different from the [Hand] tool, image cannot be
moved.
While dragging, area other than the tone drawing
area are diplayed in pink.
J [Rotate Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Rotate] tool, and the pate
location of the tone can be rotated about the pin
by dragging.
When the effect i hard to ee, pating a tone with
a large pattern make it eaier to ee.
While dragging, area other than the tone drawing
area are diplayed in pink.
K [Zoom Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Zoom] tool, and the content
diplayed in the [Preview] area can be zoomed in or out
by dragging.
Zoom in by clicking on the image; zoom out by holding
down the [Alt] key while clicking on the image.
The magnification can be elected from 13 level of
5. 0% ~ 800. 0%.
Thi function only change the diplay magnification
and doe not influence the tone ize.
L [Pin Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Pin] tool, and center (pin)
when rotating the tone can be moved by clicking.
The pin location i et to the Top Right of the image
in the initial etting.
M [Scale Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [scale] tool, and the tone
ize can be changed by dragging.
With the pin a the center and the vertical/
horizontal apect ratio maintained, reduce the ize
by moving cloer to the pin, and increae the ize
by moving away from the pin.
The modified cale i diplayed in the [scale Input]
box. ([scaling can alo be done by directly inputting
value in the [scale Input] box)
While dragging, area other than the tone drawing
area are diplayed in pink.
When binary monochrome tone are elected, the
curor become the [Prohibit Mark], and the caling
operation cannot be done.
A
B
C
DEF G
H
I
K
J
L
M
N O
P
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
U V
W
X
QR
S
T
h
g
i
j k l m n
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 221/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 222/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 223/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 224/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 225/415
Editing
Chapter 8
This chapter introduces the functions for editing line and image data.
Step: 01 Cut and Pate 228
Step: 02 Edit Lining 232
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
Step: 03 Move and Tranform 237
Step: 04 Retouching 241
Step: 05 Black-White Reveral and Making 251
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 226/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 227/415
User Guide
227
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
Copying to another ApplicationThe image content i copied to the Os clipboard. The copied content can be pated
into another application through the Os clipboard.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
Create a election. Refer to "Chapter 6. selection"(⇒ p. 169) for creating the
election.
2. Select the Command
select the [Copy to Another Application] command from the [Edit] menu.
The election portion of image i copied to Os clipboard, and the image remain
unchanged.
The content copied to the Os clipboard can be pated to another active application
through the [Pate] command.
Explanation
List of Clipboard-Supported Layers
The image layer that upport copying to clipboard are lited below.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer][Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Text Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 228/415
Manga Studio
228
PastingThe content copied to the clipboard i pated onto image.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Pasting with Transparent WhiteThe content copied to the clipboard i pated with [White] of the drawing color
made [Tranparent].
2. Select the Command
select the [Pate White Tranparent] command from the [Edit] menu.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to the original poition.
2. Select the Command
select the [Pate] command from the [Edit] menu.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 229/415
User Guide
229
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
The content copied to clipboard i pated with the color denity et to opaque. Thi
i only poible for a 32-bit rater layer.
Pasting with Opaque Color(32-Bit Only)
A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to the original poition
with [White] drawing color portion changed to [Tranparent].
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to original poitionwith the color denity changed to opaque.
2. Select the Command
select the [Pate Color Opaque] command from the [Edit] menu.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 230/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 231/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 232/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 233/415
User Guide
233
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
Change the width of the drawn line.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer][Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Change Width Tool
Option] palette i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
A ~ L
same a [Join Line] tool. Refer to "Line Joining Tool"( ⇒ p. 233).
M [Widen to the Specified Width]
Increae (thicken) the line width to the pecified amount whenever
applicable.
N [Narrow to the Specified Width]
Decreae (thin) the line width to the pecified amount whenever applicable.
O [Expand to the Specified Magnification]
Increae (thicken) the line width by the pecified ratio whenever applicable.
(Vector layer only)
P [Reduce to the Specified Magnification]
Decreae (thin) the line width by the pecified ratio whenever applicable.
(Vector layer only)
Q [Set Constant Line Width]
Change to the pecified line width regardle of the original width. (Vector
layer only)
R [Entire Line]
Correct the entire line, and not jut the pecified portion. (Vector layer only)
L
I
J
K
E F
M
N
A B
C
D G H
O
P
Q R
Width Changing Tool (EX only)
Operation Method
select the line, and correct the line width.
1. Open the PageOpen the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Change Width] tool from the [Tool] palette.
3. Correct the Line
When the line to be corrected i elected, the line width i corrected.
1
1 Ue the [Change Width] tool to elect the portion where the line width i to be
corrected.
2 At the elected portion, correction i made uing the etting width in the
[Change Width Tool Option] palette.
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 234/415
Manga Studio
234
Correct the line drawn in [Vector Layer].
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Blur] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Edit Line] tool.
Operation Method
select the line drawn by vector, and correct it.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
supported drawing layer [Vector Layer]
Non-upported drawing
layer
[Rater Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
3. Correct the Line
When the line to be corrected i elected, the line i corrected.Edit Lining Tool (EX only)
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Edit Line Tool
Option] palette i diplayed.
A ~ L
same a [Join Line] tool. Refer to "Line Joining Tool"( ⇒ p. 233).
M [Join Line]
If the end of the line adjoin each other, they are joined by 1 line.
N [Smoothing]
Correct by moothing out line jag.
・[Round Angles]
Round the angle.
・[Correct Entire Line]
The entire line i proceed.
O [Eliminate Dust]
Clear away hort line remnant and uch like at the extreme.
L
I
J
K
E F
M
N
A B
C
D G H
O
Viewing of Tool Options
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 235/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 236/415
Manga Studio
236
5. Transformation Completes
The image' [Move and Tranform] i completed.
If the guideline i not diplayed, click on the [Diplay/Hide Guideline] icon found on
the [Move and Tranform] tab of the [Propertie] palette to turn it ON.
Note
Viewing of the [Move and Transform] Tab
A [Cancel] and [Retry]
[Cancel] and [Retry] can be performed on the action in [Adjut Poition].
B [Flip Vertical] and [Flip Horizontal]
The image can be flipped vertically or horizontally.
C [Show Guide Line] and [Hide]
The diplay and non-diplay of the guide line can be toggled.
Diplay it for the cae of adjuting through the drag operation with diplay of
handle in the image' periphery.
D [Center Point]
Modify center point to Enlarge, shrink or Rotate. Click the button to move
center point to the poition you indicate.
E [Anti-aliasing]
Anti-alia when rotating or tranforming image. It i only valid for [Rater
Layer] or [selection Layer] of 8 bit or above.
F [Leave Original Image]
Leave a copy of the original image when moving or tranforming.
[Processing Types]
select the proceing from among [scale], [Rotate], [Free Tranform], [Ditort],
and [Perpective].
The dragging of handle in the image' periphery work in repone to the
elected proceing.
[Scale]
specifie the cale of the image in percentage of [Width] and [Height].
・ [Relative]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the current condition. After
confirmation, it revert to 100%.
・ [Abolute]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the initial condition. It
cannot be pecified if the image wa changed through the ue, uch a of
[Rotate], [Free Tranform], and [Ditort].
[Keep Aspect Ratio]
scale while keeping to the horizontal and vertical ratio of the image.
[Position]The image poition i pecified in mm for [Left] and [Top].
[Angle]
specifie the image' rotation angle.
A BC D
E F
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 237/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 238/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 239/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 240/415
Manga Studio
240
F [Use size as the value on screen]
Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the ize of [size
Preview] i reflected in the effect extenion for ditortion.
G [Hardness]
set the intenity of effect at pen' periphery.
H [Size Preview]
Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The etting can be adjuted even if
the preview i dragged.
I Offset Settings Menu
It i poible to elect the direction of hift from among [shift in Forward
Direction], [shift Left], [shift Right], [Expand Center], [shrink Center],
[Compre to Left], [Compre to Right], [Extend to Left], and [Extend to Right].
J [Effect Amount]
set the ditortion' effect amount.
K [Reflect pen pressure in effect amount]
The pen preure of pen tablet i reflected to the ditortion' effect amount.
L [Tone Distort]
Ditort the tone pattern.
M [Also Distort Points]
Alo ditort the tone point (dot). When OFF, the point (dot) poition or hape
i not ditorted.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 241/415
User Guide
241
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
Applie peed line' blurring effect to image.
3. Blur the Line
When the area i elected, the peed line effect i applied to the image.
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [speed Line Tool
Option] palette i diplayed.
A ~ L
same a [Join Line] tool. Refer to "Line Joining Tool"( ⇒ p. 233).
M [Direction]
set the direction of the reultant peed line by angle.
N [Length]
set the length of the reultant peed line.
O [Length Disorder]
set the diorder of the length of reultant peed line.
P [Interval]
set the interval of the reultant peed line.
Q [Interval Disorder]
set the diorder of the interval of reultant peed line.
L
I
J
K
E F
A B
C
D G H
Viewing of Tool Options
M
N
Q
O
P
Operation Method
select the area, and apply the peed line effect.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [Blur] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [speed Line] tool.
supported drawing layer
[Rater Layer]
[Tone Layer][Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer]
Non-upported drawing layer
[Vector Layer]
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
Speed Lines Tool(EX only)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 242/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 243/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 244/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 245/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 246/415
Manga Studio
246
Mixe color at portion of the image.
3. Correct the Image
The color are mixed and applied to the dragged portion of the drawing.
Operation Method
Mix and blur the color of the dragged portion.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
2. Select the Tool
Right-click the [stamp] tool f rom the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Color
Mixing] tool.
Color Mixing Tool (EX only)
[Before Color Mixing]
[After Color Mixing]
Concept
It i poible to bring out the effect a if the paint are mixed with the finger.
supported drawing layer[Rater Layer](8-bit/32-bit)
[selection Layer](8-bit)
Non-upported drawing layer
[Rater Layer](1-bit/2-bit)
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer](1-bit)
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 247/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 248/415
Manga Studio
248
Partially darken the image.
3. Correct the Image
The color of the dragged portion darken.
Operation Method
Darken the dragged portion.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
select the layer from the [Layer] palette.
2. Select the Tool
Hold down the [stamp] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Burn] tool.
Burning Tool (EX only)
[Before Burning]
[After Burning]
Concept
The light expoure of the pecified portion i lifted and it darken.
supported drawing layer[Rater Layer](8-bit/32-bit)
[selection Layer](8-bit)
Non-upported drawing layer
[Rater Layer](1-bit/2-bit)
[Vector Layer]
[Tone Layer]
[Revere Layer]
[Making Layer]
[selection Layer](1-bit)
[Ruler Layer]
[Panel Ruler Layer]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 249/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 250/415
Manga Studio
250
A mak ([Making Layer]) i created and the covered portion of the image i made
to diplay tranparently.
The [Panel Folder] i mainly ued o that the image that jut out of the panel
frame are not diplayed.
Thi i not retricted to the [Panel Folder], and page can alo be imilarly maked.
Concept
Making i applied to the image in the panel folder.
Masking Layer(Such as Panel Folder)
[Page Image]
[Panel Folder] Image
・[Masking Layer] is OFF
The image of a character drawn in the [Panel Folder] jut into and overlap the
panel below.
[Panel Folder] Image
・[Masking Layer] is ON
[Page Image]
Due to [Making Layer], the protruding portion of the character drawn in the
[Panel Folder] i hidden and i not diplayed in the panel below.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 251/415
User Guide
251
C h a p
t e r
8
E d i t i n g
Operation Method
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Open the Panel Folder
Open the [Layer] palette, and double-click the [Panel Folder] icon.
The [Panel Folder] i opened.
Create the [Panel Folder], and create the [Making Layer].
3. Create the Layer
Open the [Layer] palette, and click the [Create New Layer] button.
The [New Layer] dialog i diplayed.
1 select [Making Layer].
2 Click the [OK] button.
2
4. Create the Masking Image
Create the mak on the [Making Layer] with drawing tool.
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 252/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 253/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 254/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 255/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 256/415
Manga Studio
256
A [Hand]
Adjut the image' poition on the creen.
B [Add Vanishing Point to the Clicked Position]
Create a vanihing point by clicking on the image.
You can alo move a vanihing point by clicking and dragging the center mark.
C [Add Guide Line for Vanishing Point to the Clicked Position]
Add a line to the vanihing point by clicking on the image.
D
[Delete Selected Points]select vanihing point center mark (they will turn red) and click the Trah Can
to delete them.
・[Line Interval]
set the interval angle for drawing line. Thi affect the number of line.
・[Apply Settings To All Vanishing Points]
Apply the current etting to the line for all vanihing point.
・[Set Auxiliary Lines]
Create vanihing point line. Chooe the [Object selector] Tool and drag the
point to adjut the poition of the line.
Enable [snap] on the [View Menu] and elect [set snap Point] > [Perpective]to ue it like a Perpective Ruler.
・[Line Color]
set the color of viewpoint line. You can only et thi feature when [set
Perpective Ruler] i elected.
・[Actual Line Rendering]
Draw actual line along the vanihing point line.
・[Thickness]
set the width of vanihing point line.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
[Vanishing Point Filter] DialogVanishing PointsThi filter et a vanihing point and draw guideline in the image for perpective
drawing.
When the dialog appear, elect the [Add Vanihing Point] icon and click
anywhere in the image to create a vanihing point. Update the etting for an
exiting [Vanihing Point] by double-clicking the layer icon.
You can change the poition of exiting guideline in a layer by moving them on
the [Page].
A B C D
Manga Studio
Rendering Filters02
These filters are used to render new drawings directly onto the image.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Vanihing Point]
select [Drawing] → [Vanihing Point...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 257/415
User's Guide
257
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
A [Hand]
Adjut the image' poition on the creen.
B [Move]
Click on the image to create a center point for the Focu Line. You can alo
move the point by clicking and dragging it.
C [Move Drawing Position]Change the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the Focu Line
line by drawing with the pen.
D [Transform Drawing Position]
Tranform the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the Focu Line
line by dragging it.
・[Preview]
select the quality of the preview image ([High Quality]/[Mid Quality]/[Low Quality])
or chooe [None].
・[Preview Setting](EX only)
select from previouly recorded etting for Focu Line.
・[Length]
set the length of the Focu Line line.
・[Width]
set the width of the Focu Line line.
・[Distance]
set the angle interval of the Focu Line line. Thi affect the number of line.
・[Curvature]
set the curvature of the Focu Line line.
・[Displacement]
set the diplacement of the Focu Line line' tarting draw poition.
[Properties] Palette, [Focus Lines] Tab
Thi filter draw a Focu Line on an image.
It create a Focu Line with the poition, length and hape you indicate.
Update the etting for a Focu Line by double-clicking the layer icon. A B C D
Focus Lines
[Focu Line]
select [Drawing] → [Focu Line...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 258/415
Manga Studio
258
・[Random]
set the amount of randomne (if any) for each Focu Line etting ([Length],
[Width], [Ditance], [Curvature], and [Diplacement]).
・[Regenerate]
Regenerate the Focu Line if any of the [Random] etting in the dialog are et.
・[Distance]
set the ditance of the Focu Line line to the center point.
・[Arrange Curve Anchor]
Thi option i effective only if you've et a [Curvature] value.
When elected, the Focu Line line are placed with their vertice at the
ditance you pecify from the center point, and aligned o they do not cro
each other.
When not elected, the curve are drawn baed on the tarting draw poition
(the red line). The curve will not be aligned.
・[Stroke-in/Stroke-out]
set the tapering of the Focu Line line: [Inide], [Outide] or both.
・[Drawing/Background Color]
set the Drawing Color and Background (BG) Color of the Focu Line to one
of the following: [Black], [White], [Tranparent], [Black BG, Tranparent], or
[White BG, Tranparent].
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer and draw new Focu Line
line baed on the current etting.
・[Set Oversampling]
Convert the Focu Line to graycale and moothe any jagged edge.
・[Show Page Image in Panel Window]
select whether to how or hide the page image.
Speed Lines
Thi filter draw speed Line on an image.
It create speed Line with the poition, length and hape you indicate.
Update the etting for a et of speed Line by double-clicking the layer icon.
[speed Line]
select [Drawing] → [speed Line...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 259/415
User's Guide
259
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
A B C
A [Hand]
Adjut the image' poition on the creen.
B [Move]
Click on the image to create a center point for the speed Line. You can alo
move the point by clicking and dragging it.
C [Move Drawing Position]
Change the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the speed Line by
drawing with the pen.
・[Preview]
select the quality of the preview image ([High Quality]/[Mid Quality]/[Low Quality])
or chooe [None].
・[Settings](EX only)
You can chooe from previouly recorded etting for speed Line.
・[Lines]
set the number of speed Line.
・[Length]
set the length of the speed Line.
・[Width]
set the width of the speed Line.
・[Elevation Angle]
set the angle of the speed Line.
・[Curvature]
set the curvature of the speed Line.
・[Distance]
set the ditance interval between speed Line.
[Properties] Palette, [Speed Lines] Tab ・[Displacement]
set the hift of the speed Line' tarting draw poition.
・[Random]
set the amount of randomne (if any) for each speed Line etting ([Length],
[Width], [Ditance], [Curvature], and [Diplacement]).
・[Regenerate]
Regenerate the speed Line if any of the [Random] etting in the dialog are et.
・[Curve Alignment Level]
Thi option i effective only if you've et a [Curvature] value.
When elected, the speed Line are placed with their vertice at the ditance
you pecify from the center point, and aligned o they do not cro each other.
When not elected, the curve are drawn baed on the tarting draw poition
(the red line). The curve will not be aligned.
・[Taper]
set the tapering of the speed Line: [Inide], [Outide] or both.
・[Drawing/Background Color]
set the Drawing color and background (BG) color of the speed Line to one ofthe following: [Black], [White], [Tranparent], [Black BG, Tranparent], or [White
BG, Tranparent].
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[Set Oversampling]
Convert the speed Line to graycale and moothe any jagged edge.
・[Show Page Image in Panel Window]
select whether to how or hide the page image.
[Edit Settings] Dialog (Speed Lines & Focus Lines)
・[Save Current Settings]
save the current etting.
・[Rename Settings]
Open the [Rename setting] Dialog, where you can change the name of the
elected etting.
・[Delete]
Delete aved etting.
・[OK]
Apply the elected etting.
From the [Focu Line] or [speed L ine] Filter Dialog, click the [Edit...] button. The
[Edit setting] Dialog will appear where you can tore etting that you've created.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 260/415
Manga Studio
260
Thi filter draw a cloud pattern on the image.
Cloud Pattern (EX only)Thi filter draw a lightning pattern on the image.
set the poition of the lightning on the page. Ue the dialog to et other option.
Lightning Bolt (EX only)
[Cloud Pattern]
select [Drawing] → [Cloud Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Lightning]
select [Drawing] → [Lightning Bolt...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
[Lightning Bolt]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 261/415
User's Guide
261
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s A B C
A [Hand]
Adjut the image' poition on the creen.
Click and drag the center point of a lightning point to move it. Click and drag
the circular frame around a lightning point to change it ize or the ize of it
lightning bolt.
B
[Add Lightning Fork]Click anywhere in the image to add a lightning point.
C [Delete Selected Lightning Fork]
Delete all elected lightning point.
・[Line Width]
set the width of lightning bolt.
・[Type]
Chooe the type of lightning to create: [Bolt + Lightning], [Bolt] or [Lightning].
・[Drawing/Background Color]
Chooe the drawing color and background (BG) color from one of thefollowing: [Black BG, Tranparent], [White BG, Tranparent] (2bit only), [Black],
[White] (2bit only), or [Tranparent].
・[Preview]
Preview your etting on the page.
[Lightning Bolt] Dialog
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 262/415
Manga Studio
262
Polar Coordinates (EX only)Thi filter project your image onto a cylinder or phere.
Chooe from [Convert from Orthogonal to Polar Coordinate], [Convert from Polar
to Orthogonal Coordinate], or [Reflection in spherical Body].
Manga Studio
Transform Filters03
These filters are used to transform your image.
[Polar to Orthogonal Coordinate]
[spherical Projection]
・[Convert From Orthogonal To Polar Coordinates]Convert your image from rectangular coordinate (in which all coordinate axe
are orthogonal) to polar coordinate.
・[Convert From Polar To Orthogonal Coordinates]
Convert your image from polar coordinate (which repreent radiu and angle)
to rectangular coordinate.
・[Reflection In Spherical Body]
Tranform the image a if it were projected on a phere.
[Polar Coordinates] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Orthogonal to Polar Coordinate]
select [Tranform] → [Polar Coordinate...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 263/415
User's Guide
263
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Wave (EX only)
Thi filter tranform your image with a rippling wave pattern.
・[Direction]
set the angle of the wave.
・[Amplitude]
set the amplitude of the wave.
・[Number of Waves]
set the number of wave.
[Wave] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Wave]
select [Tranform] → [Wave...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 264/415
Manga Studio
264
Waveforms (EX only)
Thi filter tranform your image baed on a waveform (ine wave, etc.).
Chooe from a [sine], [Triangle] or [square] waveform.
[Rectangular Wave]
・[Sine]
Tranform your image' coordinate with a ine wave (a cyclically varyingwaveform).
・[Triangle]
Tranform your image' coordinate with a triangular wave.
・[Square]
Tranform your image' coordinate with a rectangular wave.
・[Regeneration]
Reapplie the waveform filter baed on the dialog etting.
・[Number of Waves]
set the number of wave.
・[Wavelength]
set the ditance between peak of the wave.
・[Amplitude]
set the amplitude of the wave.
・[Horizontal Scale]
set the horizontal cale of the waveform.
・[Vertical Scale]
set the vertical cale of the waveform.
・[Wrap Around]
Fill in pixel from the oppoite edge of the image.
・[Repeat Edge Colors]
Fill the image by extending the pixel at the edge of the image.
[Waveforms] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[sine Wave]
[Triangular Wave]
select [Tranform] → [Waveform...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 265/415
User's Guide
265
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Spiral (EX only)
Thi filter tranform your image with a piral pattern.
Zigzag (EX only)
・[Rotation]
set the zigzag' degree of rotation.
・[Number of Waves]
set the number of zigzag wave.
[Zigzag] Dialog
Thi filter tranform your image with a waving pattern from the center of the
image outward.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[spiral]
・[Twist]
set the degree of twit.
・[Pull]
set the amount of pull in the image.
[Spiral] Dialog
select [Tranform] → [spiral...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Zigzag]
select [Tranform] → [Zigzag...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 266/415
Manga Studio
266
Brightness and Contrast (EX only)Thi filter adjut the brightne and contrat of your image.
Manga Studio
Image Adjustment Filters (EX only)04
These filters are used to perform adjustments to your image.
・[Brightness]
Adjut the image' brightne. small value make the image darker, while
large value make the image brighter.
・[Contrast]
Adjut the image' contrat (the relative brightne and darkne of part of
the image). small value reduce the contrat in the image, while large value
increae the contrat.
・[Auto Adjust]
Automatically adjut the brightne and contrat of the currently loaded
image.
・[Preview]
show a preview image on the page.
[Brightness/Contrast] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Brightne] = 100, [Contrat] = -25
select [Image Adjutment] → [Brightne/Contrat...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 267/415
User's Guide
267
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Tone Curve (EX only)Thi filter generate a graph of the image' level that you can adjut. Click inide
the graph to add control point. Drag the control point to change the graph and
adjut the image. Drag control point outide the graph to delete them.
The horizontal [Input] axi repreent the original brightne value. The vertical
[Output] axi repreent the adjuted brightne value.
・[Tone Curve]
A graph for adjuting the intenity of color in your image. Drag the control
point to adjut the image.
The horizontal [Input] axi repreent the original brightne value. The vertical
[Output] axi repreent the adjuted brightne value.
・[Preview]
show a preview image on the page.
・[Reset]
Reet the image to it initial etting.
[Tone Curve] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Tone Curve]
select [Image Adjutment] → [Tone Curve...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 268/415
Manga Studio
268
Level Adjustment (EX only)
Thi filter i ued to adjut the intenity of color in your image with a hitogram.
Move the triangular control point below the hitogram to the right to darken the
image, or to the left to brighten it.
If the hitogram doe not cover the entire width of the window, move the control
point to the peak of the hitogram. By etting the hitogram' width to fill the
window, you can adjut the entire image.
A [Histogram]
show a graph that contain information about the amount of darkne (left)
and brightne (right) in the image.
B Shadow [Input]
set the darket color in your image.
By default, thi i et to the leftmot point on the hitogram.
C Gamma [Input]
set the brightne of the midtone in your image.
D Highlight [Input]
set the brightet color in your image.
By default, thi i et to the rightmot point on the hitogram.
E Shadow [Output]set the depth of the darket color in your image.
F Highlight [Output]
set the depth of the brightet color in your image.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
・[Auto Adjust]
Automatically adjut the level in the currently loaded image.
[Level Adjustment] Dialog
A
B C D
E F
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Adjut Level]
select [Image Adjutment] → [Adjut Level] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 269/415
User's Guide
269
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Hue/Saturation/Value (EX only)Thi filter adjut the three color component of your image in the HsV (Hue/
saturation/Value) color model.
・[Hue]
set the tint to adjut the level of red, blue and yellow and in your image.
・[Saturation]set the brilliance of your image' color to adjut the color intenity.
・[Value]
set the brightne of color in your image.
・[Input]
show the color in your image before adjutment.
・[Output]
show the color in your image after adjutment.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Hue/Saturation/Value] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X X ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Hue] = -86, [saturation] = 1, [Value] = 39
select [Image Adjutment] → [Hue/saturation/Value...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 270/415
Manga Studio
270
Bitmap (EX only)
Thi filter convert your image to only black and white, with no graycale.
・[Threshold As Reference]
Reduce the image' color to black and white baed on a threhold level you et.
・[Halftone Dither]
Replace the color in your image with geometric pattern of black and white
dot to imulate hade.
・[Random Dither]
Diffue the error that arie during color reduction into the urrounding area,
reducing the color to black and white pixel to imulate hade.
・[Threshold]
You can input a value here if you've choen [Threhold] from the [Type] lit.
Pixel with a value over the [Threhold] you et will be changed to black, while
pixel below that value will be changed to white.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Bitmap] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Bitmap], Threhold = 75
select [Image Adjutment] → [Bitmap...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 271/415
User's Guide
271
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Dust Filter (EX only)Thi filter i ued to remove any mall dut particle in your image. select an area
of the image you want to apply the filter to.
Manga Studio
Line Adjustment Filters (EX only)05
These filters are used to perform adjustments to lines in your image.
・[Size]
set the ize of the dut particle to be deleted.
・[Dust Color]
set the color of the dut particle to be deleted.
・[Drawing Color]
set the color that will replace the deleted dut.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Dust Filter] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer O - O
[Dut Cleaner]
select [Line Adjut] → [Dut Filter...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 272/415
Manga Studio
272
Thi filter i ued to join diconnected line with mall gap between them.
Thi i ueful for creating completely encloed area for filling.
When ued on a [Rater Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Join Line] Tool.
When ued on a [Vector Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Edit Line] Tool.
Join Line
[Join Line] (Rater Layer)
Thi filter i ued to mooth out line in your image.
When ued on a [Rater Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Blur] Tool.
When ued on a [Vector Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Edit Line]
Tool.
Smooth
[smoothing] (Vector Layer)
Edit Line (EX only)Thi filter i ued to join diconnected line or mooth out line.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer O - O
select [Line Adjut] → [Edit Line...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 273/415
User's Guide
273
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
・[Smoothing]
Correct haky line by moothing them out.
・[Join Width]
set the degree of moothing to perform.
・[Round Off Corners] (vector only)
Round off any harp corner in the line.
・[Correct Entire Line] (vector only)Perform moothing on the entire line.
・[Join Line]
Connect two line with a mall gap between them.
・[Join Width]
set the trength of the line joining function.
・[Browse Color] (raster only)
select the reference color for the image to f ilter.
・[Drawing Color] (raster only)
select the color to draw when joining the line.
[Line Edit] Dialog
Thi filter i ued to change the width of exiting line in your image.
Change Width (EX only)
・[Widen To Specified Width]
Widen the line to the pecified width.
・[Narrow To Specified Width]
Narrow the line to the pecified width.
・[Expand To Specified Scale] (vector only)
Magnifie the line by the pecified cale.
・[Reduce To Specified Scale] (vector only)
shrink the line by the pecified cale.
・[Set To Constant Thickness] (vector only)
set the line to the pecified width.
・[Process The Entire Line] (vector only)
Perform Change Width on the entire line.
[Change Width] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer O - O
[Change Width] (Vector Layer)
select [Line Adjut] → [Change Width...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 274/415
Manga Studio
274
Mosaic (EX only)Thi filter add a moaic effect to the diplayed image.
The moaic effect i created a a new [Tone Layer]. You can add to them or adjut
their etting jut like normal tone.
Manga Studio
Effect Filters (EX only)06
These filters add special effects to your images.
Thi filter i ued when you want to harpen a blurry image or make hape more
ditinct. It harpen the image by increaing the contrat along boundary line.
There are two filter: [sharpen] and [sharpen (Heavy)].
Sharpen (EX only) /Sharpen (Heavy)(EX only)
・[Block Size]
set the ize of the quare that make up the moaic.
[Mosaic] Dialog
[Moaic]
select [Effect] → [Moaic...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[sharpen (Heavy)]
select [Effect] → [sharpen...] or [sharpen (Heavy)] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 275/415
User's Guide
275
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Posterization (EX only)
Thi filter adjut the number of hade in the image.
Invert Tone (EX only)
Thi filter revere the color in your image. The RGB (red/green/blue) and Alpha
(tranparency) channel will be inverted.
Black will be changed to white, and vice-vera.
・[Posterization Level]
set the level of poterization to be performed.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Posterization] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer X ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Poterization]
select [Effect] → [Poterization...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Invert Tone]
select [Effect] → [Invert Tone] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 276/415
Manga Studio
276
Manga Studio
Blur Filters (EX only)07
This filter blurs your image.
Gaussian Blur (EX only)Thi filter moothe out your image. You can et the degree of blur you want.
Thi filter i ued to mooth out boundary line and harp area of your image.
[Blur] and [Blur (Heavy)] filter are available.
Blur (EX only)/Blur (Heavy)(EX only)
・[Blur Range]
set the range of the blur.
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Gaussian Blur] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Blur (Heavy)]
select [Blur] → [Blur...] or [Blur (Heavy)] from the [Filter] menu.For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Gauian Blur], 2mm
select [Blur] → [Gauian Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 277/415
User's Guide
277
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Radial Blur (EX only)Thi filter moothe out your image in concentric circle.
A B
A [Hand]
Adjut the image' poition on the creen.
B [Move]
Move the center point of the blur.
・[Blur Range]
set the range of the blur.
・[Blur Position]
select the blur direction from [Forward & Back], [Forward] or [Back].
・[Blur Method]
select the blur method from [Box] or [smoothing].
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Radial Blur] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Radial Blur]
select [Blur] → [Radial Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 278/415
Manga Studio
278
Motion Blur (EX only)Thi filter i ued to mooth out boundary line and harp area of your image by
blurring them along a contant direction.
・[Blur Range]
set the range of the blur.
・[Blur Direction]
set the direction in which to motion blur.
・[Blur Method]
select the blur method from [Box] or [smoothing].
・[Blur Position]
set the blur direction from [Forward & Back], [Forward] or [Backward].
・[Preview]
show a preview image.
[Motion Blur] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ○
Vector Layer × - ×
[Motion Blur]
select [Blur] → [Motion Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 279/415
User's Guide
279
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Manga Studio
Drawing (Comic Filters Vol. 1) (EX only)08
These filters are used to render new drawings directly onto the image. They area included in "Comic Filters Vol. 1" (sold separately).
Thi filter create a fanciful, "parkling" pattern.
Sparkle (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the preview window.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Sparkle]
set the relative ize of the parkle effect.
・[Soft Focus]
set the ize of the oft focu effect.
・[Size]
set the ize of the particle (parkle and oft focu effect).
・[Amount]
set the number of particle.
・[Perspective]
set the perpective of the particle.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[Drawing Color]
select the color to draw.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Sparkle] Dialog
A
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[sparkle]
select [Drawing] → [sparkle...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 280/415
Manga Studio
280
Thi filter create a fanciful, "falling now" pattern.
Soft Focus (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the preview window.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Thickness]
set the relative ize of the oft focu effect.
・[Amount]
set the number of nowflake.
・[Perspective]
set the perpective of the nowflake.
・[Elevation Angle]
set the angle from the ky that the nowflake fall in.
・[Tilt]
set the amount the now lean from left to right.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[Drawing Color]
select the color to draw.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Soft Focus] Dialog
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[soft Focu]
select [Drawing] → [soft Focu...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
A
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 281/415
User's Guide
281
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Thi filter i ued to create a random crohatch pattern.
Patterns (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the preview window.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Starting Darkness]
set the tarting denity of the crohatching.
・[Finishing Darkness]
set the ending denity of the crohatching.
・[Fineness]
set the detail level of the crohatching.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[Direction]
set the direction of the crohatching.
When unchecked, the starting Denity value i applied to the center of the
election.
・[Elevation Angle]
set the angle of the crohatching.
・[Drawing Color]
select the color to draw.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Patterns] Dialog
A
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Crohatching]
select [Drawing] → [Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 282/415
Manga Studio
282
Thi filter i ued to create a random lattice pattern.
It appearance i imilar to tained gla or a tone wall.
Random Grid Pattern (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the preview window.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Thickness]
set the width of the line.
・[Number Of Areas]
set the number of cell in the lattice pattern.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[Drawing Color]
select the color to draw.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Random Grid Pattern] Dialog
A
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Random Lattice Pattern]
select [Drawing] → [Random Grid Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 283/415
User's Guide
283
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Thi filter i ued to create a rain pattern.
Rain (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Length]
set the length of the raindrop.
・[Thickness]
set the width of the rain.
・[Rain Amount]
set the amount of raindrop.
・[Perspective]
set the perpective of the raindrop.
・[Elevation Angle]
set the angle from the ky that rain fall in.
・[Tilt]
set the amount the rain lean from left to right.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[Drawing Color]
select the color to draw.
・[Clear Layer]
Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Rain]
select [Drawing] → [Rain...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
[Rain] Dialog
A
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 284/415
Manga Studio
284
2D Rotate (EX only)Thi filter allow you to view your image from different angle by adjuting the
angle of rotation along the X, Y, and Z axe.
Manga Studio
Distort (Comic Filters Vol. 2) (EX only)09
These filters are used to transform your image. They area included in "Comic Filters Vol. 2" (sold separately).
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
B [X Axis]
The X axi i hown by a horizontal red line through the center point of thepreview window.
The amount of [X Rotation] i performed about thi line.
C [Y Axis]
The Y axi i hown by a vertical red line through the center point of the
preview window.
The amount of [Y Rotation] i performed about thi line.
D [Z Axis]
The Z axi i hown by a blue line perpendicular to the preview window
paing through it center point.
The amount of [Z Rotation] i performed about thi line.
・[Reset]Reet each parameter to 0. 0.
・[Perspective]
set the degree of perpective in your image.
・[X-axis Rotation]
set the amount to rotate your image about the X axi.
・[Y-axis Rotation]
set the amount to rotate your image about the Y axi.
・[Z-axis Rotation]
set the amount to rotate your image about the Z axi.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[2D Rotate] Dialog
A
B
CD
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[2D Rotate]
select [Ditort] → [2D Rotate...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 285/415
User's Guide
285
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Thi filter i ued to queeze the center of a elected area either inward or outward.
Pinch (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
・[Amount]
set the trength of the pinch effect.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Pinch] Dialog
A
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Pinch]
select [Ditort] → [Pinch...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 286/415
Manga Studio
286
Thi filter allow you to add a "rotating" effect to your image.
You can et option with the [setting] button.BA
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[speed Rotation]
select [Ditort] → [speed Rotation...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
Speed Rotation (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
B [Move Center Point]
Move the poition of the center point.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Length]
set the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Length Disorder]
set the amount of variance in the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Interval (P)]
set the interval of the peed line.
・[Interval]
set the variance in the interval of the peed line.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Speed Rotation] Dialog
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 287/415
User's Guide
287
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
setting] button.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Ditorted Focu Line]
select [Ditort] → [Ditorted Focu Line...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
Distorted Focus Lines (EX only)
B [Move Center Point]
Move the poition of the center point.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Length]
set the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Length Disorder]
set the amount of variance in the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Interval (P)]
set the interval of the peed line.
・[Interval Disorder(P)]
set the variance in the interval of the peed line.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Distorted Focus Lines] Dialog
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 288/415
Manga Studio
288
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
B [Move Center Point]
Move the poition of the center point.
・[Settings]
You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.
For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).
・[Length]
set the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Length Disorder]
set the amount of variance in the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.
・[Interval (P)]
set the interval of the peed line.
・[Interval Disorder(P)]
set the variance in the interval of the peed line.
・[Random]
set a pattern to generate.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Distorted Speed Lines] Dialog
AThi filter allow you to add a speed Line effect to your image.
You can et option with the [setting] button.
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[Ditorted speed Line]
select [Ditort] → [Ditorted speed Line...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
Distorted Speed Lines (EX only)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 289/415
User's Guide
289
C h a p t e r
9
F i l t e r s
Thi filter can be ued to tranform your image with a pherical or cylindrical hape.
Spherical (EX only)
A [Hand]
Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.
・[Amount]
set the trength of the effect.
・[Cylinder]
Project your image onto a cylinder.
・[Direction]
set the orientation of the cylinder on which to project your image.
・[View Scale]
set the cale of the preview window.
・[Merge Page Image]
show the page image in the preview window.
[Spherical] Dialog
A
supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ X
Vector Layer × - ×
[spherical]
select [Ditort] → [spherical...] from the [Filter] menu.
For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 290/415
Manga Studio
290
Thi filter let you ee the reult of a tranform involving viewing an object from a
180-degree angle.
Fisheye Lens (EX only)
A
A [Hand]
Ued to adjut the poition of the image in the Preview screen.
・[Distort]
set the degree of the ditortion.
・[View Scale]
set the diplay ratio for the Preview screen.
・[Merge Page Image]
Overlay the page image on the Preview creen.
How to read the [Fisheye Lens] dialog
supported color depth 1/2 bit 8 bit 32 bit
Rater Layer ○ ○ ×
Vector Layer × - ×
[Fiheye Len]
From the [Filter] menu, elect [Format] → [Fiheye Len...].
Refer to "Filter Baic"( ⇒ p. 257) for baic filter operation.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 291/415
Rendering
Chapter 10
This chapter introduces the methods for importing photo and 3D data and then incorporating it into drawings.
Step: 01 2DLT (EX only) 294
Step: 02 3D sketching (EX only) 302
R e n d e r i n g
Step: 03 3DLT (EX only) 324
C h a p t e r
10
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 292/415
Manga Studio
292
Manga Studio
2DLT (EX only)01
The 2DLT rendering function is a drawing support function that imports a photograph and then converts it to lines and tones.
2DLT Rendering FunctionThi chapter explain the concept and operation of the 2DLT rendering function.
Concept
The 2DLT rendering function ha the following feature.
[Original Image]
・Data Save
Becaue a photo image i aved into the 2DLT layer folder, re-etting can be done
eaily.
[2DLT Rendering Image]
[Layer] palette
Supported 2D Images
Image of the following format can be imported.
supported Format BMP, JPG, PNG, PsD (Photohop), TIFF, TGA (Targa)
・ Converting a Photograph to Lines and Tones
Thi function take a 2-dimenional image (photo, etc.) and then render it into
a line and tone image. The line and tone are output to their own repective
layer, and therefore can be added to any image.
[Example of Ue]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 293/415
User Guide
293
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Operation Method
Photograph can be imported and then ued a background image.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the CommandFrom the [File] menu, elect [Import] -> [2DLT...].
3. Make the Rendering Settings
A preview i diplayed on the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window. At the ame
time, on the [Propertie] palette, the [2DLT setting] tab -> [2DLT] tab are
diplayed.
The [Open] dialog will be diplayed.
1 select the image file.
2 Click the [Open] button.
1
2
1
1 Make the etting needed for 2DLT rendering. Refer to "2DLT setting"
( ⇒ p. 297) for 2DLT etting.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 294/415
Manga Studio
294
4. Export 2DLTImage
A monochrome image i exported from the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
A [2DLT Layer Folder] i created on the [Layer Palette].
On the [Layer] palette, elect a [2DLTlayer folder]. Double-clicking thi folder caue
the [2DLT setting] tab of the [Propertie] palette to be diplayed, making etting
change eay.
Application
2 If neceary, adjut the [size] and [Poition] of the image by witching to the
[Move and Tranform] tab of the [Propertie] palette and then moving the
lider while viewing the image.
Refer to "Image File" in "Importing" ( ⇒ p. 44) for the operation of the [Move
and Tranform] tab.
3 Upon the completion of etting, click the [OK] button on any tab.
2
3
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 295/415
User Guide
295
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
2DLT Setting2DLT rendering etting i done uing the [2DLT setting] tab -> [2DLT] tab of the
[Propertie] palette.
setting related to [2DLT] rendering i performed.
・Select a resolution from the [Output Resolution]
Pop-up menu. Note that you cannot et a higher reolution than that et a the
tandard page reolution.
[Output Attributes]
select an output attribute.
・[Sketch]
Render the image uing the ketching attribute. Note that when you elect
[sketch Ue], then [Multiple Tone Gradation] cannot be elected for [shading].
・[Finish]
Render the image uing the Finih attribute.
Rendering Setup
・[Shading]
Perform the etup for the [2DLT] [shading].
・[Raster Gradation]
Extract that hading with gradation. Poterize the input image, and then create
a ingle hading image layer.
・[Multiple Tone Gradation]
Extract thoe [Tone Layer] that have tone gradation. Poterize the input image,
and then create multiple tone layer.
Import Image
You can now import image for 2DLT rendering by dragging and dropping image
file onto a page in the [Edit] window’ [Page] tab.
1 select the file icon you want to import.
1
2
2 Drag and drop the elected file icon onto the page being hown in the [Edit]
window.
3 When the [select Proce] dialog appear, click the [2DLT] radio button.
4 Click the [OK] button.
3
4
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 296/415
Manga Studio
296
Outline Setting
・[Outline Width]
You can adjut the line width that i ued when line are extracted from the
image layer. If we aume that, immediately after import, a tandard image i
"0", then adjutment can be made within a range of +- 5.
specifying a poitive value caue the outline to become thicker, while anegative value make them thinner.
Make the etting related to [Outline] for [2DLT].
[Outline Width] + 3
[Outline Width] -3
[Original Image]
・[Detection After Posterization]
The outline are extracted after poterization i done uing the pecified value.
Thi poterization ha no effect on the poterization layer.
・[Number Of Gradations]
You can elect a value between 2 and 20 for the poterization level.
・[Apply Smoothing]
To prevent the appearance of jaggie, an appropriate level of moothing i
applied.
5 While the image i being imported, the [Propertie] palette will appear and
how the current etting on the [2DLT setting]→ [2DLT] tab.
6 select the etting you want on the [Propertie] palette and click the [OK] button.
5
6
7
7 The image will be rendered in black & white on the page.
8
8 A [2DLT Layer Folder] will be created for the imported image on the [Layer] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 297/415
User Guide
297
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
[Edge Height Threhold]: 10. 0
[Variation slope Threhold]: 10. 0
[Blur Range]: 3. 0
[Edge Height Threhold]: 0. 0
[Variation slope Threhold]: 0. 0
[Blur Range]: 0. 5
・[Blur Range]
Adjut the blur range without detecting the outline.
・[Carry Out Ver. 3 Processing]
Perform proceing uing the Ver. 3.0 algorithm. A the algorithm are lightly
different, the reult will alo differ lightly.
* The original image i the ame a for [Extract Outline 1].
・[Edge Height Threshold]
You can adjut the height of thoe edge that are extracted a an outline,
reducing the value to obtain the optimum edge height, o that a light change
i detected a being a line.
・[Variation Slope Threshold]
For the amount by which the outline thickne i changed, you can adjut
the continuity of the detected line. setting a larger value make horter line
eaier to detect. Good reult are obtained by etting a value of around 1/2 to1/3 of the [Edge Height Threhold].
・[Extract Outline2]
Ued when a more delicate repreentation i required.
[Outline Threhold]: 255
[Detection Direction]: [Top]・[Right]
[Outline Threhold]: 1
[Outline Threhold]: 20
[Detection Direction]: [Top]・[Right]
[Outline Threhold]: 3
[Original Image]
・[Outline Threshold]
Uing [Outline Threhold], elect the gray denity threhold ued to extract
outline. The maller the value that you et, the wider the area that i taken a
an outline, and the greater the number of line that are detected.
・[Detection Direction]
specify the outline detection direction. For thoe direction for which the
checkbox i not checked, the outline detection will be weak.
・[De-noising Intensity]
Thi value can be adjuted when, for example, an exceive number of hadow
are detected.
・[Extract Outline 1]
The firt outline extraction method i given below. The ue of thi method i
uually pecified.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 298/415
Manga Studio
298
[Black Fill Threhold]: (Initial Value)
[Black Fill Threhold]: After changing the threhold
・[Black Fill Threshold]
Ue the lider to adjut the threhold of the range to which black fill i applied.
Posterization
Make the etting related to [Poterize] for [2DLT]. While noting the relationhip
between the different value, move the lider to make thi adjutment.
[Original Image]
・[Posterization]
Adjut the poterization that i applied to the gray denity of the entire image.
Uing the lider, adjut the range threhold.
[Poterization] 2 layer
[Poterization] 4 layer
・[Match To The Tone Gradation]
Placing a check mark in thi box when you are etting [Tone Gradation] let
you imultaneouly adjut the etting of [Tone Gradation].
When thi box i checked, the [Poterization] lider i diabled.
[Original Image]
Clicking the bottom of the lider caue a △ to appear. The denity i et for
the poition that you click.
Clicking the right end of the lider caue the denity to be low, while clicking
the left end caue it to be high. To completely erae the hading, drag the 、
outide the lider.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 299/415
User Guide
299
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Prior to 2DLT proceing, a partial filter i applied to the image. Refer to "Chapter 9.
Filter"( ⇒ p. 255) for filter operation.
Preprocessing Filter
You can edit the ize and poition of a cene.
[Refer to [Move and Tranform] ( ⇒ p. 237) for the operation of the [Move and
Tranform] tab.
Move and Transform
Make the etting related to [Tone] for [2DLT]. set the image denity, number of
tone layer to be ued, and o on.
・[Tone Gradation]
You can et the tone denity.
・[Tone Lines]
Diplay the etting made with [Tone Gradation]. For the denity, clicking
the lider caue an editing box to be diplayed, in which you can adjut the
numeric etting.
・[Roughness of Grain]
Adjut the "Roughne of Grain" for the tone. setting a larger value make the
tone grainier. Note that thi etting cannot be made when [Match to the Tone
Gradation] i checked.
Tone Settings
[Tone Gradation] 2 layer (Initial Value)
[Tone Gradation] 4 layer
[Original Image]
Clicking the bottom of the lider caue a △ to appear. The denity i et for
the poition that you click.
Clicking the top of the lider allow you to adjut the tone denity. Clicking the
right end of the lider caue the denity to be low, while clicking the left end
caue it to be high. To completely erae the tone, drag the ▽ outide the lider.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 300/415
Manga Studio
300
Manga Studio
3D Sketching (EX only)02
The 3D sketching function is a drawing support function that imports 3D data and then creates an image.
Thi chapter explain the concept and operation of the 3Dketching function.
[3D Data]
[sketching starting from a 3D Preview Image]
[Layer] palette
Concept
The 3D ketching function ha the following feature.
・Data Save
Becaue the 3D data i aved to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder), it i
eay to revie the etting for the layout and o on.
・Converting 3D Data to a 3D Preview Image
Thi function ue 3-dimenional data to create a 3D preview image. Thi 3D
preview image can act a a ketch for ue with a drawing tool.
[Example of Ue]
Basics of the 3DSketching Function
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 301/415
User Guide
301
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
1 3D object and camera layout are performed. Refer to "3D Object
Operation"( ⇒ p. 308 -) for the operation of 3D object, and "Camera
Operation" (⇒
p. 312-) for the operation of a camera.
4. Perform Drawing
Uing the diplayed 3D preview image a a ketch, perform drawing uing the
drawing tool.
・Uing [Import] of the [Propertie] palette, you can import multiple file for ue a3D object. Alo, becaue thee are diplayed in the center of the creen, exercie
care when importing thee one by one.
・ Double-click [3D Workpace] on the [Layer] palette. The [Propertie] palette will
be diplayed, allowing you to adjut the layout and rendering etting for the 3D
data.
Application
Operation Method
After importing a 3D file, create a 3D preview image (3D preview layer).
3. Make the 3D Object Layout Settings
Upon the completion of 3D data import, a 3D preview image i diplayed on
the page and, on the [Layer] palette, a [3D Workpace] (Layer Folder) and "3D
Preview Layer" are created.
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, make the 3D object
layout etting.
1 select the 3D data.
2 Click [Open].
The [Open] dialog will be diplayed.
2
1
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Import the 3D Data
From the [File] menu, elect [Import] -> [3D File].
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 302/415
Manga Studio
302
The following type of 3D data can be ued with the 3D Workpace.
3D object files
Supported 3D data
Thi i a 3D object file created with 3D oftware.
supported Format Note
LWO (LightWaveObject file)
(1)LWOB format
(LightWave4. 0-5.6) (2) LWO2 format
(LightWave6. 0-7.0)
OBJ
DXF Object defined with 3DFACE.
sHD (shade file)
Data converion i performed when an
sTC (shade/Mangastudio export file)
i imported, uch that the data may
have to be revied.
・Option: Texture mapping
The pating of a 2D image (texture) onto the urface of an object to give it a
textured appearance i called "texture mapping."
supported Format Texture image format Mapping method
LWO
(Light Wave Object file)BMP/JPEG/TGA
Planar mapping, Cubic
mapping, UV mapping
(UV mapping i upported
by LWO2 only)
OBJ (main MTL file) BMP/JPEG/TGA UV mapping
DXF Incompatible Incompatible
sHD (shade file) file content UV mapping
sTC (shade/Manga
studio export file)BMP UV mapping
LWs(Light Wave scene file)
Depend on containedLWO
Depend on containedLWO
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 303/415
User Guide
303
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
By converting multiple object file into a group, texture mapping, multiple poe,
parent-child relationhip, and rotation axe can be upported.
supported format Note
LWs (LightWavescene file) Verion 3 (Light Wave 6.0-7.0)
・Option: Parent/Child Relationship (LWS only)
The tate in which a mater/lave relationhip i maintained between part i
referred to a a "Parent/Child Relationhip."
・Option: Axis of Rotation (LWS only)
Among thoe file with a “Parent/Child Relationhip,” ome will have an
indirect tructure. such a file i called an "Axi of Rotation."
・Option: Pose (LWS only)
Multiple poe baed on "Parent/Child Relationhip" and "Axe of Rotation"can be aved. Thi allow you to elect a poe at import.
3D Scene File
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 304/415
Manga Studio
304
Operation Method
Drag the 3D frame onto the page, o a to create a 3D workpace,
3D Frame Tool
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
The [3D Frame] tool create the 3D workpace (3D panel folder).
2. Select the Tool
select the [3DFrame] tool from the [Tool] palette.
3. Create a 3D Workspace
Drag the [3D Frame] tool onto the page.
1 Click the [Import] button.
A 3D workpace i created on the page, a [3D Workpace] (Layer Folder) i
created on the [Layer] palette, and the [3D Workpace] tab i diplayed on the
[Propertie] palette.
The [Open File] dialog will open.
2 select the 3D data.
3 Click the [Open] button.
The 3D data i imported into the 3D Workpace.
1
2
3
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [3D Frame Tool
Option] palette i diplayed.
A [Switch To 3D Selection After Creation]
After the 3D workpace ha been created, the [3D Frame] tool can be witched
to the [3D selection] tool.
A
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 305/415
User Guide
305
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
3D Selection ToolThe [3D selection] tool i ued to elect a 3D object in the 3D workpace
(3D panel folder).
Viewing of Tool Options
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [3D selection Tool
Option] palette i diplayed.
A [Move]
You can move a elected 3D object by dragging.
B
[Rotate]You can rotate a elected 3D object by dragging.
C [Scale]
You can zoom a elected 3D object in and out by dragging.
D [Show Manipulator]
Diplay the 3D manipulator.
3D object ha been rotated horizontally.
Operation Method
select a 3D object by clicking it in the 3D workpace.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [3Dselection] tool from the [Tool] palette.
3. Manipulate the 3D Data
select a 3D object with the [3D selection] tool.
Manipulate the 3D object on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette. In
thi example the [Horizontal] lider of the [Rotate] column i being operated.
A
B
C
D
A 3D object can be elected from the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the
[Propertie] palette.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 306/415
Manga Studio
306
Manipulating 3D Objects
You can move a 3D object, rotate it, and change it ize.
3D Object Space
The pace in which 3D object are arranged i referred to a the [3D Objectspace]. The [Bae] of the grid within the [3D Object space] i ued a a guide for
arranging 3D object.
3D Object Move
After you have elected a 3D object, you can change the poition of that object
by moving the [X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Move] column of the [3D
Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
1. Coordinates in the 3D Object Space
After importing a 3D object by electing [Import...] -> [3D File...] from the
[File] menu, the [Bae], [Vanihing Point] indicated with a blue [+], and the
[3D Workpace Center] indicated with an orange [+] are diplayed on the
page.
If a [Vanihing Point] i moved to a point outide the creen, the [+] direction i
indicated by ▲ . Immediately after import, the center of the 3D workpace will
appear in the middle of the 3D object pace. The workpace can be moved by
dragging.
2. Rotating [Vanishing Points]
By dragging a [Vanihing Point], the entire [Bae] can be rotated to either a parallel
or perpendicular orientation. Thi i convenient while the [Move] button i elected
and you want to rotate a [Vanihing Point].
Orange [+] Center of the 3D workpace
Blue [+] Y-axi grid vanihing point
line' [+] X-axi grid vanihing pointRed [+] Front grid vanihing point
Orange [+]:
Center of the 3D workpace
Blue [+]:
Vanihing point of
Y-axi grid
Blue [+]:
Vanihing point
of Y-axi grid
Orange [+]:
Center of the 3D workpace
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 307/415
User Guide
307
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
3D Object Rotation
After you have elected a 3D object, you can rotate that object by moving the
[X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Rotate] column of the [3D Workpace] tab
of the [Propertie] palette.
3D Object Size
After you have elected a 3D object, you can enlarge or reduce the ize of that
object by moving the [size] lider in the [size and Perpective] column of the [3D
Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 308/415
Manga Studio
308
3D Object Auto Adjust
After you have elected a 3D object, you can increae or reduce it ize to fit the
creen by clicking the [Auto Adjut] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the
[Propertie] palette.
3D Object Ground
After you have elected a 3D object, you can ground that object to the bae line of
the 3D pace.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 309/415
User Guide
309
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
3D Object Reset
After you have elected a 3D object, if you click the [Reet] button on the [3D
Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, the tate exiting when the 3D object
layout wa imported will be retored.
Operation with the 3D Manipulator
The [3D Manipulator] i ued to manipulate 3D object.
1. Display the 3D Manipulator
Uing the [3D selection] tool, click a 3D object.
2. Manipulate the 3D ObjectUing the 3D manipulator, manipulate the 3D object.
Y-axi move Drag the [Red] tr iangle A up or down
X-axi move Drag the [Green] triangle B to the left or right
Z-axi move Drag the blue triangle C forward or backward
Vertical rotation Drag the [Green] ring D vertically
Horizontal
rotation
Drag the [Red] ring E horizontally
X-axi rotation Drag the [Blue] ring F to the left or right
size Drag the gray ring G in the enlarge/reduce direction.
A
BC
D
E
FG
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 310/415
Manga Studio
310
Camera Operation You can adjut the camera' poition, rotation, and perpective.
Camera Selection
By electing [Camera] from the object tree, you can then elect a camera.
Moving a Camera
After you have elected a camera, you can change the poition of that camera
by moving the [X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Move] column of the [3D
Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
Distance between 3D Object and Camera
After you have elected a camera, you can change the ditance between the
camera and the object by moving the [Ditance] lider in the [Move] column of the
[3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 311/415
User Guide
311
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Camera Rotation
After you have elected a camera, you can rotate that camera by moving the
[X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Rotate] column of the [3D Workpace] tab
of the [Propertie] palette.
Using Perspective (Camera)
After you have elected a camera, you can change the perpective of a 3D object
by moving the [Perpective] lider in the [size and Perpective] column of the [3D
Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 312/415
Manga Studio
312
Display AdjustmentOn the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, you can pecify how
imported 3D object are diplayed.
3D Object Show/Hide
When you click a 3D object on the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the[Propertie] palette, that 3D object or part will be hidden.
Outlines
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, remove the check mark
from the [Outline] check box to hide the outline.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 313/415
User Guide
313
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Shading
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, the [Gradation Bar] can be
adjuted to a value whereby the hading i opaque.
Remove the check mark from the [shading] check box to hide the hading for
that object.
Active Display
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette elect, from the [Active Diplay]
pull-down menu, the diplay method to be ued when manipulating a 3D object.
・[Box]
A 3D object can be diplayed in a quare frame.
・[Outline]
A 3D object i diplayed a an outline.
・[ Wire Frame]
A 3D object i diplayed a a wire frame.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 314/415
Manga Studio
314
Texture Display (Texture Data Only)
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, place a check mark in the
[Texture] check box. Thi enable texture diplay with 3D data for which texture i et.
Flip
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, place a check mark in the
[Flip] check box. The rear face of the object will be diplayed (rendered).
Normally, only the front face of a 3D object i diplayed (rendered). When rendering
i viewed from the rear, it appear tranparent. Therefore, whenever a rear face of
an object i rendered, it will be tranparent. ,
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 315/415
User Guide
315
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Both Sides Display
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, place a check mark in the
[Both side Diplay] check box. Both the front and rear face of the object will be
diplayed (rendered).
Normally, only one face of a 3D object i diplayed (rendered).
Explanation
Grid
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, you can elect the type of
grid diplay to be ued.
・[Front Grid]
When you click the [Front Grid] button, a grid i diplayed on the front face of
the object.
・[Side Grid]
When you click the [side Grid] button, a grid i diplayed on the ide face of
the object.
・[Vertical Grid]
When you click the [Vertical Grid] button, a vertical grid i diplayed.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 316/415
Manga Studio
316
3D Space RulersYou can create a ruler in the 3D object pace. Thi can aid you in your drawing work.
Rulers
After importing a [Ruler Layer], you can create a ruler in the 3D pace. Refer to
"Chapter 4 Ruler"( ⇒ p. 107) for ruler.
[Ruler] i diplayed in the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie]
palette.
2. Select the Command
On the [Toolbar], click the [snap to Ruler] button.
3. Perform Drawing
The ruler i imported into the [3D Workpace]. An imported ruler can be
manipulated like a 3D object by uing the [3D selection] tool and o on.
Furthermore, if you create an image layer on the [Layer] palette, you can draw a
line on that image layer to which a "Ruler" in the [3D Workpace] will nap.
1. Import the Ruler
Create a ruler in the [Ruler Layer] uing a drawing tool like the [Line] tool.
On the [Layer] palette, drag the [Ruler Layer] to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 317/415
User Guide
317
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Perspective Ruler
After importing the [Image Layer], you can create a perpective ruler in the 3D
pace. Refer to "Perpective Ruler"( ⇒ p. 123) for the perpective ruler.
1. Import the Image Layer
Create a new image layer on the [Layer] palette.
2. Select the Command
On the [Toolbar], click the [snap to Perpective Ruler] button.
On the [Layer] palette, drag the [Image Layer] to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder).
3. Perform Drawing
"Camera Focal Point" on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette
can be ued a a vanihing point and perpective ruler.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 318/415
Manga Studio
318
Basics of 3D Human modelsThi chapter explain the concept and operation of 3D human model.
Concept
3D human model have the following feature.
1. 3D Human models
Among the 3D cene file (LWs), thoe containing figure are referred to a
"3D human model."
2. Parts Can be Made Movable, Deleted
Becaue the LWs conform to a "Parent/Child Relationhip," for "3D human
model," the perpective can be made movable and deleted.
3. Waist Placed at Center
The wait (wait) of a 3D ketch figure i created a a parent part, uch that
movement or rotation of the entire figure i centered on the wait of the figure.
When you make a figure movable or rotate it, the proce progree from the
parent part to the child part.
[Propertie] Palette object tree
[Propertie]Palette object tree
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 319/415
User Guide
319
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Pose Selection
3D human model are aved in a variety of poe, allowing you to elect a poe
when you import the 3D data. Refer to "3D sketching Function Baic"(⇒ p.
303) for the import of 3D data.
Using Perspective (Parent/Child Relationship)
Each part of a 3D ketch figure i aved with a "Parent/Child Relationhip," and
each part can be rotated (made movable), placed in a variety of poe, and deleted
on a part-by-part bai.
1. Select the Part
select a part of a 3D ketch figure uing the [3D selection] tool.
2. Rotate the Part
Uing the variou 3D manipulator a elected part can be rotated indirectly. The
lider of the 3D Workpace tab can alo be ued to perform thi operation.
1. Select a Pose
Diplay the [Open] dialog.
1 select the 3D Data.
2 Operate the lider, and then elect one frame ("X/X" of the preview indicate
the diplayed number of poe from which you can make a election).
3 Click the [Open] button.
2. Import will be complete.
The 3D ketch figure ha now been imported.
1
3
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 320/415
Manga Studio
320
Saving Poses and ScenesYou can ave a erie of poe, individual poe, and cene.
Saving Motions (Series of Poses)
You can make the part of a 3D object movable, and alo save that movement.
1. Select the Part
select a part from the Object t ree of the [Propertie] palette.
2. Move the Part
Move the elected part or 3D object into the poe that you want to save.
4. Check the Movement
By moving the lider, you can check each saveed motion key.
3. Save a Pose
When you click the [Add Motion Key] button, the motion at that intant i
saveed. The location i alo saveed and a tamp placed at that location.
2 I
1 Move the lider to the right.
2 Click the [Add Frame] button to save the frame.
To remove a key frame, move the lider to the poition correponding to the key
frame to be removed, and then pre the [Delete Frame] button.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 321/415
User Guide
321
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Saving a Pose
save the poe of the object file (extenion: CsO).
1. Pose the Part
Move the elected part or 3D object into the poe that you want to save.
2. Save the Pose
Click the [Export] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
1 select CsO for [File Type].
2 Click the [save] button.
The [save A...] dialog i diplayed.
The poe ha been aved.
2
1
Saving a Scene
save the cene a a cene file (extenion: CsD).
1. Perform Layout or Arrangement
Multiple elected 3D object can be laid out or arranged and then saveed.
2. Save the Scene
Click the [Export] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
1 select CsD for [File Type].
2 Click the [save] button.
The [save A...] dialog i diplayed.
The cene ha been aved.
1
File Format Note
saving CsD (Manga studio Document) cene
File Format Note
saving CsD (Manga studio Document) poe
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 322/415
Manga Studio
322
Thi chapter introduce the concept and baic operation of the 3DLT rendering
function.
Concept
The 3DLT rendering function ha the following feature.
・Data Save
Becaue the 3D data i aved to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder), it i
eay to revie the etting for the layout and o on.
・Converting 3D Data to Lines and Tones
Thi function take 3-dimenional data and then export it to a line and tone
image. The line and tone are exported to their own repective layer, and
therefore can be added to any image.
[Example of Ue]
3DLT Rendering Function Basics
[Layer] palette
Manga Studio
3DLT (EX only)03
The 3DLT rendering function is a drawing support function that imports 3D data and then creates an image.
Image to which [3DLT rendering ha been applied]
[3D Data]
Supported 3D Data
The upported type of 3D data are the ame a for the『3Dsketching Function』.
Refer to "3D sketching Function"(⇒ p. 304).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 323/415
User Guide
323
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Operation Method
3DLT rendering i applied to 3D data.
1. Make the Rendering Settings
Import the 3D data to the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.
Refer to "3D sketching Function Baic"( ⇒ p. 303) for the import of 3D data.
1 Click the [Rendering] button.
2 Make the neceary etting. Refer to "3DLT setting"( ⇒ p. 326) for the etting
method.
The [3DLT Rendering] dialog i diplayed.
2
Double-click [3D Workpace] on the [Layer ] palette. The [Propertie] palette will be
diplayed, allowing you to adjut the layout and rendering etting of the 3D data.
Explanation
2. Exporting 3DLT Images
A 3DLT image for which line and tone eparation ha been performed can be
exported to the [Page] window. A [3DLT Rendering Folder] i created in the [3D
Workpace] (3D Panel Folder) of the [Layer] palette.
1
3
3 Click the [OK] button.
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 324/415
Manga Studio
324
3DLT SettingsOn the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, click the [Rendering...]
button. The [3DLT Rendering] dialog will appear.
Outlines
Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the outline.
・[Line Width]
set the line width of the outline.
・[Raster Layer]
Perform rendering of the outline at the rater layer.
・[Vector Layer]
Perform rendering of the outline at the vector layer.
・[Details...] button
Diplay the [Outline setup] dialog.
Grid
Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the grid.
・[Resolution]
select a reolution for the grid correponding to the [Grid] button that i et to
ON. The maximum value that can be et i equal to the tandard value given in
the page file.
Smooth
Placing a mark in the check box caue moothing to be applied to the outline
and hading.
・[Level]
You can pecify the degree of moothing that i applied. The higher the value
that you et here, the longer the line that are ubjected to curving.
(Texture)
Make the etting needed for texture rendering.
・[Texture Resolution Image]
Perform image rendering from an object texture in order to perform 2DLT
proceing. Thi can only be applied to an object with texture.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 325/415
User Guide
325
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
Shading
Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the hading.
・[Lighting Direction]
Drag the globe to et the direction of the light.
・[Posterization]
Poterize the hading.
・[Grayscale Bar]
Clicking the lider caue a △ to appear. The poition that you click determinethe denity. Clicking the left end of the lider caue the denity to be high,
while clicking the right end caue it to be low. Click the required number of
layer. △ will appear. To completely erae the hading, drag the △ outide the
lider. Click the denity to adjut it.
・[Convert To Tone]
Convert the hading to tone.
・[Type]・[Line]・[Angle]・[Size]・[Distort]
Conform to the tone etup. Refer to "Tone"( ⇒ p. 216) for the tone etup.
・[Raster Layer]
Perform rendering of hading that ha been converted to tone at the raterlayer.
・[Tone Layer]
Perform rendering of hading that ha been converted to tone at the tone
layer.
・[Raster Layer Resolution]
select a reolution for the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder). The maximum
value that can be et i equal to the tandard reolution in the page file (the
actual data reolution will be the rater layer reolution of the import ource).
・[Clear Rendering Folder]
Clear the rendering folder.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 326/415
Manga Studio
326
How to read the [Outline Setting] dialog
Perform outline etup.
・[Line Width]
You can et the width of the line ued to draw an outline.
・[Detection Accuracy[F]]
You can et the outline detection quality.
・[Outside Panel Accentuation[E]]
You can et the level of poterization that i applied to the outer line of an outline.
・[Depth]
You can adjut the depth by manipulating the line width graph. A the
difference between the maximum and minimum value of [Near] and [Far]
increae, the line are drawn to further emphaize the depth. Clicking add a
point to a graph, and the ubequent line will be f ine.
・[Apply Only To External Panel]
The outline tre effect i applied only to the outermot line.
・[Reset]
Retore the original etting.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 327/415
User Guide
327
C h a p t e r
10
R e n d e r i n g
The four view conit of the upper view, front view, ide view, and perpective,
and allow a 3D object to be diplayed in any of four direction. Any 3D objectmove/tranform that i applied to one face i reflected on the other face.
On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, click the [Four View]
button.
Click the [Camera] button of the [Four View] dialog.
[Camera Operation] mode i et, uch that move and tranform are applied to the
camera.
Click the [OK] button of the [Four View] dialog to apply your changed etting to
the page.
Four Views
Concept
Thi chapter explain the concept and operation of four view.
Method 1: Display Four Views
Click the [Diplay Object Tree on Top View] button (or another of the button) in the
[Four View] dialog. The object tree will be diplayed on the correponding face.
Method 3: Display Object Tree
Method 2: Display Camera Operation Mode
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 328/415
Manga Studio
328
How to read the [4 Orthogonal Views] dialog
In the [Propertie] palette [3D workpace] tab, when you click the [4 Orthogonal View] button, the [4 Orthogonal View] dialog will be diplayed.
A [Select camera]
select a camera object.
B [Zoom in/Zoom out]
switch to the zoom in and zoom out tool.
C [Rotate]
switch to the rotate tool.
D [Move]switch to the move tool.
E [Undo]
Undo the previou operation.
F [Redo]
Redo the the undone operation.
G [Reset]
Return operation to when the dialog wa opened.
H [Auto-adjust]
Automatically adjut the ize of the object.
I [Perspective view adjustment]
Automatically adjut to a perpective view.
J [Hide the object tree]
Hide the object tree.
K [Display object tree in top view]
Diplay the object tree in the top view.
L [Display object tree in front view]
Diplay the object tree in the front view.
M [Display object tree in rear view]Diplay the object tree in the rear view.
N [Scale]
Adjut the cale of the elected image.
O [Show Page Image in Panel Window]
Diplay the page image.
A B C D F G H I J K L M N OE
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 329/415
Text and Word Balloons
Chapter 11
This chapter deals with text information input and how to create balloons.
Step: 01 Text 332
Step: 02 Balloon 348
C h a p t e r
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 330/415
Manga Studio
330
Manga Studio
Text01
It is possible to enter text from the keyboard onto the screen.
Text function basicsHere we will introduce the text function concept and operation method.
Concept
Uing the [Text] tool, it i poible to enter text with the keyboard. The entered text
can be managed per layer a a [Text layer].
Text toolText can be entered onto the page.
Operation Method
Nominate the poition, enter the text and ue the [Propertie] palette [Text]→
[Character etting] tab to finalize.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Toolselect the [Text] tool from the [Tool] palette.
3. Nominate position
Click the moue on the poition where you want to input text.
Thi will open the [Propertie] pallet and allow you to enter text with the
keyboard.
Manga studio text file are Unicode.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 331/415
User Guide
331
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
5. Complete text input
Text input will finih and a new [Text layer] will be created.
4. Input text
When the text i input, a rectangular area [Text ize change guide] will be
diplayed (When not diplayed, thi ha been turned off in the [Propertie]
palette diplay etting).
When the urrounding are dragged, the text poition will move and if you
drag the quare handle, you can zoom in and out.
・ When changing the etting for one bit of text when entering, ue drag to
elect the text.
・ When you click on the [Text] tool after entering text, the [Text ize change
guide] will be diplayed and you can change the poition and ize by dragging.
・ When re-editing text, double click the [Text layer] icon or double click with the
[Text] tool and you can re-edit through the [Propertie] palette.
. When opening a file created on another computer, if a font i not available onthe computer being ued, the text will be diplayed in a replacement font and
will be diplayed in a red frame.
Explanation & Application operation
When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Text Tool Option]
Palette i diplayed.
Viewing of Tool Options
・[Store in the text folder]
Create a [Text folder] in the [Layer] palette to tore the input [Text layer].
After entering text, in the [Text etting] tab in [Text] from the [Propertie] palette ,
configure the text and the text will be confirmed after clicking [OK].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 332/415
Manga Studio
332
Text preferencesWith the [Text layer] elected from the [Layer] palette, when the [Propertie] palette i
elected from the [Window] menu, the [Text]→ [Character setting] tab will be
diplayed.
A [Show/Hide Character Size Change Guide]switch between diplaying or not diplaying the font ize change guide.
B [Show/Hide Dialog Balloon Size Change Guide]
switch between diplaying or not diplaying the balloon ize change guide.
・[Use style](EX only)ss
Make tyle etting uable.
・[Settings](EX only)
The [style etting] dialog will be diplayed and you can configure tyle
etting. For detail on tyle etting refer to『style etting』( ⇒ P. 338).
・[Font]select the font type.
・[Character spacing]
Adjut the width between character.
・[Line spacing]
Adjut the pace between line.
・[Size]
Adjut the text ize.
・[Specify %]
set the vertical pacing a a percentage of the text ize (size).
・ [Bold Face], [Italic Face], [Outline (Small)], [Outline (Large)],
[Underline], [Strikethrough], [Horizontal-in-Vertical]
Enable the variou character embellihment.
・[Ruby settings](EX only)
The [Ruby etting] dialog will be diplayed and you can configure ruby
etting. For detail on ruby etting refer to『Ruby etting』( ⇒ P. 335).
・[Delete ruby](EX only)
Delete ruby etting.
・[Align]
select from [Align Top], [Align Center] and [Align Bottom] for the line
alignment.
・[Text/BG color]
You can elect the text (drawing color) and background color.
[Black/
Tranparent]
Draw [Black] text on a tranparent background. Uually ue
in thi condition.
[White/
Tranparent]
Draw [White] text on a tranparent background. Ued when
inerting outline character on a black background.
[Tranparent/
Black]
Draw [Tranparent] text on a black background. The character
will be tranparent on the bottom image and can be woven
into tone, etc.
[Tranparent/
White]
Draw [Tranparent] text on a white background. The character
will be tranparent on the bottom image and can be woven
into tone, etc.
・[Vertical Text]
Enter text to be written vertically.
・[Outline]
Embellih the et white outer frame with text.
・[Preview the outer frame]
Preview the text white outer frame.
・[View Page Image]
Diplay the page image.
・[View Input Field]
Diplay an [Input field] (for inputting text) for pecial character, ymbol, etc
which are difficult to input from a keyboard.
A B
・ The [select ruby] button on the [Text etting] tab will only be available whilt
electing text.
・ The Manga studio EXP (special character) included in Font pack Vol.1 can be
ued after electing [Private ue] in the [Input field].
Note
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 333/415
User Guide
333
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
Operation Method
On inputted text it i poible to add maller reading of Japanee Kanji by the
[Ruby etting] dialog.
Ruby settings (EX only)The concept and operating method of ruby etting will be explained.
Concept
You can attach ruby (maller reading of Japanee Kanji) to the text.
1. Open the [Properties] palette
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
On the [Layer] palette, double click on the [Text layer] icon of the text you want
to attach ruby to.
2. Select text
The [Propertie] palette [Text setting] tab will be diplayed.
1 Drag and elect the text you want to attach the ruby to.
2 Click the [Ruby setting] button.
1
2
select the Kanji that you want to attach the ruby to.
Enter the reading of the character.
The Ruby will be attached.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 334/415
Manga Studio
334
1 Input the ruby.
2 set the font, ize, etc.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3. Configure ruby settings
The [Ruby setting] dialog will be diplayed.
1
3
2
4. Ruby attachment is complete
Click [OK] on the [Propertie] palette.
Text with ruby i confirmed.
Ruby will be attached to the text.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 335/415
User Guide
335
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
[How to read the Ruby settings] dialog
With the text elected on the page, it will be diplayed when you click the [Ruby
etting] button on the [Propertie] palette [Text]→ [Text setting] tab.
・[Target Text]
Up to 10 row of text which upport the ruby will be diplayed.
You are unable to input text from thi column; however, you can eparate the
line of text by hitting [Enter].
You can retore the eparated line of text by hitting the [Backpace] key.
・[Ruby]
Enter ruby for [supported text].
・[Font]
select the font to be ued in ruby.
・[Size]
select the ize of the font to be ued in ruby.
・[Set Font Size To 1/2 Main Text Size]
Automatically configure ruby font ize to be half of the original text.
Even after adjuting the ize of the original text at a later date, the ruby text
will automatically adjut to 1/2.
・[Position]
select from [Align Top], [Align Center] and [Align Bottom] for the ruby diplay
poition.
・[Adjustment]Adjut the ruby diplay poition.
・[Interval Between Main Text]
set the pace between the ruby and the original text.
・[Character Spacing]
select from [1 pace], [2 pace], [3 pace] and [Free] for the ruby letter pacing.
・[Set All Ruby As Target]
Allow all rubie uing the ame dialog.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 336/415
Manga Studio
336
Style settings (EX only)The concept and operating method of tyle etting will be explained.
Concept
The combination of font, etc can be et for text.
Configure the [style etting] dialog.
Operation Method
1. Open the [Properties] palette
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
On the [Layer] palette, double click on the [Text layer] icon of the tyle you
want to configure.
2. Select style
The [Propertie] pallet [Text setting] tab will be diplayed.
Hiragana: DFPKoIn-W4
Kanji: DFPKanTeiRyu-XB
Hiragana: DFPKanTeiRyu-XB
Kanji: En-POP
1 Check the [Ue style] check box.
2 You can elect from previouly created tyle here if preent.
3 When creating new tyle or changing the etting, click the [setting] button.
1
2
3
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 337/415
User Guide
337
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
The [style etting] dialog will be diplayed.
1 style etting will be created and aved per pattern.
2 You can elect from created tyle.
3 After etting the font, ize, etc, click the [OK] button.
1
2
3
3. Style settings are complete
Return to the [Propertie] palette.
style ha been et for the text.
1 Click the [OK] button
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 338/415
Manga Studio
338
[How to read the Style settings] dialog
With the [Text Layer] elected on the [Layer] palette, it will be diplayed when you
click the [setting] button on the [Propertie] palette [Text]→ [Text setting] tab.
・[Style]
Diplay and elect from the diplayed [style etting] lit.
・[New] button
The [Create new tyle] dialog will be diplayed and a new [style] can be avedto the lit.
・[Delete] button
Delete the tyle etting for the item elected in the [style] lit.
・[Font]
select the type and ize of [Hiragana Katakana font], [Kanji font], [special
character font], [symbol font], [One byte numeral font], [1/3 double ize
numeral font], [One byte alphabet font], [Punctuation mark font] (Punctuation,
bracket, repeat ymbol, etc font for ymbol).
When ize i et a [specify %], thi will be baed on the [standard Font size].
・[Line Spacing]set the pace between elect text and the next line by number of point.
・[Line Spacing (Specify %)]
set the [Line pacing] a a percentage of the current font ize.
・[Line Spacing When Saveing Ruby]
set the text [Line pacing] by number of point when aving ruby.
・[Line Spacing When Saveing Ruby (Specify %)]
set the text[Line pacing] a a percentage of the current font ize.
・[Character Spacing]
set the letter pacing by number of point.
・ [Bold], [Italics], [Underline], [Strikethrough], [Outline (Thin)], [Outline
(Thick)], [Edge] Enable various text effects.
Enable variou text effect.
・[Font]
select the font to be ued in ruby.
・[Size]
select the ize of the font to be ued in ruby.
・[Set Font Size To 1/2 Main Text Size]
Automatically configure ruby font ize to be half of the original text. Even
after adjuting the ize of the original text at a later date, the ruby text will
automatically adjut to 1/2.
・[Position]
select from [Align top], [Align center] and [Align bottom] for the ruby diplay
poition.
・[Adjustment]
Adjut the ruby diplay poition.
・[Interval Between Main Text]
set the pace between the ruby and the original text.
・[Character Spacing]
select from [Proportional 1], [Proportional 2], [Proportional 3] and [Free] for
the ruby character pacing.
・[Auto Half size Character Horizontal-in-Vertical Alignment]
Automatically configure entered text a horizontal in vertical. With [set
column], et the number of column of the half text in horizontal in vertical.
・[Options] list
[Automatically Ue One-third size Character For 3 Or More Half ize
Character], automatically adjut double apotrophe [“”], [〝〟] vertically
and pecial text [、]・[。]・[,]・[.]・[・]・[:]・[;]・[‘Automatically
adjut
,
]・
[“”]・
[()]・
[「」
]・
[《》
]・
[{}]・
[『』
]・
[【】
]・
[〝〟
]tobe automatically inerted.
[How to read the Create new style] dialog
A dialog within the [style etting] dialog [style] lit to ave a new tyle.
Thi will be diplayed when you click the [New] button on the [style etting]
dialog.
・[Source style]
select the ource for the tyle from the [style etting lit].
・[New style name]
Configure the name of the new tyle.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 339/415
User Guide
339
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
Import a text file a a [Text layer].
Import text (EX only) 4. Import is complete.
It will be imported a a [Text layer] in the top right of the page window.
If, in the text file, there i pacing between the line, then the layer will be eparated
Explanation
1. Prepare the text
3. Select the Command
select [Import] → [Text file] from the [File] menu.
The [Open file] dialog will be diplayed.
1 select the [Text] file.
2 Click the [Open] button.
1
2
2. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Prepare the text and ave a a text file (Extenion: TXT).
5. Move the text
select the [Text layer] that you want to move on the [Layer] palette, then, on the
page, move the curor near the text until the curor change hape, then drag the
text to where you want to move it.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 340/415
Manga Studio
340
Export a [Text layer] a a text file.
Export text (EX only)
1. Open the Page
Open the title from the [story] tab of the [edit] window or open the page from the
[Page] tab.
2. Select the Command
select [Export] → [Text file] from the [File] menu.
The [save a] dialog will be diplayed. Confirm the ave name and location and
click the [save] button.
3. Export will be complete
It will be exported to the confirmed location a a text file (Extenion: TXT).
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 341/415
User Guide
341
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
The concept and operating method of [story editor] will be explained.
Concept
[story editor] i a function to unify the name (character) inide a tory and edit them.
search and replace and enter the dialog before drawing the picture.
Operation Method
In the [story Editor] dialog, enter and edit text.
1. Open the Page
Either open the title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window or the page
through the [Page] tab...
2. Select the command
select [story editor] through the [story] menu.
Story editor (EX only)
Uing the tory editor, you can enter dialog for every page.
Dialogue will be imported a a text layer.
Layout the dialog and cut the name.
3. Select text
The [story Editor] will be diplayed (When there i already text entered, it will
be diplayed in eparate line).
1 Click the enter text box to elect. When entering new text, elect [Double click
and add text].
12
2 Click the [Change] button
1
2
3
4. Edit text
The [Text] dialog will be diplayed.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 342/415
Manga Studio
342
5. Text editing is complete
The editing of the firt text box i complete.
・ [style editor] cannot be opened in [single page]. When creating from text, firt
create a new [story] by electing [Create new] → [Create] from the [File] menu.
・ The [Text] dialog will alo diplay by double clicking the text box in the [story
editor].
Note Application operation
1 When editing other text, elect the next text box and click the [Change] button and
follow from tep 4 onward. [Double click and add text] i for adding new text
and [Double click to add page] i for adding a new page.
2 When you click the [OK] button, the text edit will be aved.
1
2
[How to read the Story Editor]
Thi i a dialog to ummarize text editing.
Thi i diplayed when you elect [story Editor] from the [story] menu.
A [Page Row]
Diplay the number of page. Either double click or elect then click the
[Modify] button for the editing tatu of the [Text row] concerned.
Vertical pace will diplay the area of upported text.
B [Text Rows]
Diplay text and upported [Character] in layer unit. When you double click or
elect then click the [Modify] button, the text will be changed in the dialog.
If you lowly double click, you can directly edit the text.
・[Add text with double click]
A row of text with nothing entered. When you double click or elect then click
the [Modify] button, text can be input in the dialog.
If you lowly double click, you can directly edit the text.
・[Add page with double click]
A page with nothing entered. When you double click or elect then click the
[Modify] button, the page will be added.
・[Change] button
Add or refreh elected text or page.
・[Delete] button
Delete the elected [Text row] or [Page row]. However, page that already exit
in the [story editor] cannot be deleted.
・[Apply Changes] button
Reflect the current edited tatu of the [story editor] to the t itle.
・[Reload] button
Re-import text from the title and dicard unconfirmed editing change.
・[Import File] button
Import an external text file.
・[Search Text String]
Input the text you want to earch, click the [search up] or [search down]
button and [Text row] with correponding text will be diplayed.
select the [Text layer] that you want to move on the [Layer] palette, then, on thepage, move the curor near the text until the curor change hape, then drag the
text to where you want to move it.
A
B
1 Enter a new [Character] name or elect from a aved [Character] name.
2 Edit the text.
3 Click the [OK] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 343/415
User Guide
343
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
How to read the Text] dialog
Thi i a dialog which allow you to edit [story editor] text and elect [Character].
Thi i diplayed when you double click on the [Text row] in the [story editor] or elect
the text and click on the [Change] button.
・[Replace Text String]
When checked, input the text you want to replace with the text you want to be
replaced.
When you click the [Replace] button, the text within the elected [Text row]
will be replaced.
When you click the [Replace all] button, all text within the [Text row] will be
replaced.
・[Style]
select a tyle etting from thoe aved in the [setting] button dialog.
・[Font]
select the type and ize of the font in the [Text row].
・[Apply to all] button
Apply the elected [style] or [Font] etting to all [Text row].
・[Follow Existing Text Settings]
The font information for the elected text will match the etting for exiting text.
・[Character]
Input, diplay and elect the correponding character name from the text. In
initial etting, [None], [stage direction], [Narration] are aved.
A [Recycle bin]
Delete the elected [Character].
・[Text input area]
Input, diplay and edit text.
・[Specify Character from materials]
The [select character] button and option checkbox can be ued.
・[Specify character] button
select a [Character] from amongt the aved [Character material].
・[Show All Story Characters]
In the [select character] button election menu, diplay all of the aved
[Character material].
When the checkbox i unticked, the combined title [Character material] will be
diplayed. (Title i the et [Name of title] when aving the [Character material].
Thi title i recing from the [New title] dialog [Title information] or the [story]
menu [Modify title information] [Title information] dialog)
・[Do Not Show Same Character]In the [select character] button election menu, when there are multiple ave
of the ame [Character material], only diplay once.
・[Separate Layer with Black Line]
When entering text, if a pace i added, then the eparated text will how a
[Text row] in the [story editor].
B
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 344/415
Manga Studio
344
Associate a [Character material] to dialog.
When a [Character material] i aociated with text in the [story editor], the
correponding [Character material] can be ued from the text. Refer to『Character
material baic』( ⇒ P. 376) for more on [Character material].
2 Turn the [specify Character From Material] check box on.
3 Click the [select character] button.
2. Associate character material
select [story editor] from the [story] menu and the [story editor] will be diplayed.
1 select the text and click the [Change] button.
1
1. Open the Page or Title Either open the title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window or the page
through the [Page] tab.
5 Return to the [Text] dialog and click [OK].
The lit of aved [Character material] will be diplayed.
4 select the [Character material].
2 3
5
4
The [Text] dialog will be diplayed.
The [story editor] will be diplayed.
7 Click [OK] when all editing i complete.
6 An thumbnail image of the [Character material] will be diplayed.
6
7
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 345/415
User Guide
345
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
3. Use character material
From the [Propertie] palette [Material] tab, the [Character material] will be
reflected on the page.
In the [Layer] palette, when you elect [Text layer], on the [Propertie] palette
[Material] tab, the aociated [Character material] will be diplayed.
[Character material] can be freely pated on to the page. Refer to『Charactermaterial baic』( ⇒ P.376) for more on [Character material].
Here, [Pate layer] wa elected. Every layer aved a [Glae] will be elected and
i available for ue.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 346/415
Manga Studio
346
Balloon function basicsThe concept and operating method of balloon function.
Concept
The balloon, the [Text] inide and the urrounding [Balloon image] will be treated
a an image.
In the [Layer] palette, the [Text layer] and balloon will be treated together a a
[Balloon layer].
A balloon ha the following element:
A [Text]
Text input via the keyboard.
B [Balloon image]
The balloon material image.
C [Tail]
The connector between the balloon and the character.
BA
C
・[Raster balloon]
A rater type balloon created from a rater image.
Thi i uited when creating a complicated haped balloon.
Types of balloonsThere are [Rater balloon] and [Ruler balloon] which have variou characteritic.
Balloon upporting functionRater
balloon
Ruler
balloon
Create [Tail] × ○
Modify balloon line thickne and color × ○
Balloon fill color × ○
Balloon fill color by tone × ○
Create free tyle balloon ○ △
Balloon which are not connected by line cannot be filled.
NoteUsing balloons
Balloon can be ued by dragging and dropping a balloon material aved in the
[Material] palette onto the page.
Manga Studio
Balloons02
Create a balloon around the text and complete the dialogue.
・[Ruler balloon] (Vector)
A vector type balloon created from a ruler.
The balloon line can be edited later.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 347/415
User Guide
347
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
Create balloons (EX only)
When creating balloon, you can ave and ue an image a [Balloon material] or
create directly from [Text layer].
When creating from text, you can only create a ruler (vector) balloon.
Method 1: Save pattern as balloon material A method to ave the balloon frame ketched onto the page a [Balloon material]
and ue a required from the [Material] palette.
[Tone layer] can alo be aved a a [Balloon material].
Application Operation
Method 2: Create balloon
A method to create a [Ruler balloon] directly from a [Text layer].
A thi i a vector attribute, you can change the balloon line in detail.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
Click the deired poition and enter the text to create a [Text layer].
Can be aved from the [Edit] menu, [save pattern to balloon material]. For detail,
refer to『saving pattern a balloon material』( ⇒ P.61)
How to create a balloonRater
balloon
Ruler
balloon
save pattern a balloon ○ ○
How to create a balloonRater
balloon
Ruler
balloon
Create balloon × ○
2. Select the Tool select the [Text] tool from the [Tool] palette.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 348/415
Manga Studio
348
3. Create a balloon
Diplay the [Propertie] palette through the [Window] menu, from [Text] tab→
[Balloon etting] tab will be diplayed.
A balloon will be created and the [Generate Dialog Balloon] dialog will be diplayed.
Balloon ha been created.
1 Click the [Generate Dialog Balloon] button.
3 Configure etting
4 Click the [OK] button.
5 In the [Propertie] palette [Text] tab → Return to the [Balloon etting] tab,
configure the line thickne, color and tail, etc.
For detail on adding a tail, refer to『Adding a tail to a ruler balloon』( ⇒ P.352)
1 4
3
6
5
2
2
2 When you drag the [size change guide] you can move, zoom in or out on
balloon or text.
6 Click the [OK] button.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 349/415
User Guide
349
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
Balloon i complete and the [Text layer] ha been changed into a [Balloon layer]. [How to read the Create balloon] dialog (EX only)
Will be diplayed when you click the [Create balloon] tab from the [Balloon
etting] tab found in the [Propertie] palette → [Text]
・[Basic shape]
select the baic hape of the balloon to be created from [Ellipe], [Rectangle] &
[R rectangle].
・[R intensity]
R rectangle angle curve etting.
・[Arrange pattern]
select the arranged pattern for the balloon to be created f rom [None], [Rough],
[Punctured (weak)], [Punctured (trong)], [Expanded] & [Focu line].
・[Arrange intensity]
set the intenity of the arrange pattern.
・[Instability of Intensity]
set the fluctuation of intenity of the arrange pattern.
・[Fineness Of Intensity]
set the detail of the arrange pattern.
・[Instability Of Fineness]
set the fluctuation in detail of the arrange pattern.
・[Convert To Line]
Make the balloon hape into traight line.
・ [Change In Instability]
Change the arrange pattern randomly.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 350/415
Manga Studio
350
Add a tail to a ruler balloon
Add a [Tail] extending to a character on a ruler balloon.
3 From the inide of the balloon line drag the curor to the outide to et the tail
tart point and length.
4 Move the moue curor and once you have adjuted the tail curve and click,
the tail will be added.
5 Click the [OK] button.
31. Open the [Properties] palette
Double click the [Balloon layer] in the [Layer] palette.
2. Create a tail
The [Propertie] palette will be diplayed.
5
2
1
4
3. Adding of the tail is complete
A tail ha been added to the balloon.
1 Click the [Dialog Balloon setting] tab.
2 Click the [Add Curve Tail] button.
How to create a balloonRater
balloon
Ruler
balloon
Add tail × ○
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 351/415
User Guide
351
C h a p t e r 1
11
T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s
Balloon settings
select the [Balloon layer] or [Text] layer and when you elect the [Propertie]
palette [Text] tab → [Dialog Balloon setting] tab, you can configure the balloon.
A
[Hand]Adjut the diplay poition of the balloon material.
B [Add Curve Tail]
Add a tail with a curved line to the balloon.
C [Add Linear Tail]
Add a tail with a traight line to the balloon.
D [Delete Selected Tail, Tail Joint]
Delete the tail or tail joint from the balloon.
E [Show/Hide Character Size Change Guide]
switch between diplaying or not diplaying the text ize change guide.
F [Show/Hide Dialog Balloon Size Change Guide]
switch between diplaying or not diplaying the balloon ize change guide.
・[Generate Dialog Balloon](EX only)
Create balloon material.
・[Select Dialog Balloon From Materials]
select a balloon material from the [Material] palette material.
・[Line width]
set the balloon material line width. (Only valid for [Ruler layer])
・[Tail width]
set the balloon image tail width. (Only valid for [Ruler layer])
・[Color Of Dialog Balloon Lines]
set the balloon line color.
A B E FC
・[Color Inside Dialog Balloon]
set the color inide the balloon image.
・[Use Tones]
Pate a tone inide the balloon.
・[Settings] button
The [simple tone etting] dialog will be diplayed and tone can be configured.
For detail on the [simple tone etting] dialog, refer to『Tone baic』( ⇒ P.201).
・[Match Text] (EX only)
Adjut the ize of the balloon to the text.
・[Save This Dialog Balloon In Materials]
save the balloon currently being configured to the [Material] palette.
・[View Page Image]
View the page image.
・[View Input Field]
View an [Input field] (for inputting text) for pecial character, ymbol, etcwhich are difficult to input from a keyboard.
D
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 352/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 353/415
Displays and Windows
Chapter 12
This chapter introduces changes in screen displays.
Step: 01 screen Diplay 356
Step: 02 show Guideline 363
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Step: 03 show Information 365
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 354/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 355/415
User Guide
355
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Rotate ToolUe the [Rotate] tool to rotate the creen diplay.
2. Select the tool
Right-click the [Hand] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Rotate] tool.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
3. Rotate
Drag the image to rotate the creen diplay.
select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu to diplay [Hand Tool Option] or
the [Rotate Tool Option] palette.
Viewing Tool Options (Hand / Rotate)
A [Show All]
Diplay the image at full creen.
B [Actual Pixels]
Diplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with
creen pixel.
C [Print Size]
Diplay the image in print ize.
D [Scale]
You can enter a cale at which to view the image.
E [Angle]
You can enter an angle from which to view the image.
Operation Method
Drag over the creen to ue.A B C
The following keyboard hortcut are alo available.
・Rotate the creen、[space] Key + [shift] Key + Drag
Application
D
E
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 356/415
Manga Studio
356
Bug Glasses ToolUe the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom the screen diplay.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Tool
select the [Bug Glae] tool from the [Tool] palette.
3. Zoom the Image
Click the image to zoom in.
select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu to diplay [Zoom Tool Option].
Viewing Tool Options
A [Show All]
Diplay the image at full creen.
B [Actual Pixels]
Diplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with
creen pixel.
C [Print Size]
Diplay the image in print ize.
D [Zoom In]
Click the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom the image.
E [Zoom Out]
Click the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom out from the image.
・[Scale]
You can enter a cale at which to view the image.
・[Angle]
You can enter an angle from which to view the image.
・Drag the [Bug Glae] tool to expand the parameter.
・ [Hold the [Alt] key while clicking the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom out from the image.
・ You can alo Zoom the Image by electing the [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out]
command from the [Window] menu.
The following keyboard hortcut are alo available.
・ Zoom In [Ctrl] Key + [Num +]
[space] Key + [Ctrl] Key + Click or Drag
・ Zoom Out [Ctrl] Key + [Num -]
[space] Key+ [Ctrl] Key+ [Alt] Key+ Click
Application
Operation Method
Click on the creen or drag over the creen to ue.A B C D E
F
G
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 357/415
User Guide
357
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Screen RotationRotate the creen 90, 180, or 270 degree. Thi example ue the [Rotate 90
Degree] operation.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Rotate / Flip] from the [View] menu -> select [Rotate 90 Degree]
3. Display adjustment is complete.
The creen diplay ha rotated 90 degree.
Screen InversionInvert the image either vertically or horizontally. Thi example ue the [Flip
Horizontally] operation.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Rotate / Flip] from the [View] menu -> select [Flip Horizontally]
3. Display adjustment is complete.
The image ha flipped horizontally.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 358/415
Manga Studio
358
Actual PixelsDiplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with
creen pixel.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select the [Actual Pixel] command from the [Window] menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete.
The image i diplayed o that image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with creen pixel.
Show AllDiplay the image on a cale that fill the creen completely.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select the [Full screen Mode] command from the [Window] menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete.
The entire image i diplayed.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 359/415
User Guide
359
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Print SizeDiplay the image in print ize.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
3. Display adjustment is complete.
The image i diplayed in print ize.
select the [Print size] command from the [Window] menu.
Show Transparent Areashow tranparent area of the image in a checkered pattern.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [show Tranparent Area] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark in
the menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete.
Tranparent area of the image are diplayed in a checkered pattern.
For detail on Configuring [Print size] ee [Page: Zoom /Angle] (P. 13) in
"Preference."
Application
For detail on configuring [show Tranparent Area] ee [Page] (P. 11) in "Preference."
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 360/415
Manga Studio
360
New WindowDiplay the ame document in multiple window. Thi i ueful when you want to
zoom one part of an image and view the entire image at the ame time.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select the [New Window] command from the [Window] menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete
Two window are diplayed.
The data i the ame, o changing one page will alo change the other page. You
can alo change the diplay method for individual page.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 361/415
User Guide
361
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Manga Studio
Show Guidelines02
You can toggle the displays of items like rulers, grids, and guides on and off.
Show Print Guide and Basic FrameToggle the diplay of the print guide and baic frame on and off.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Drawing Aid] -> [Print Guide / Baic Frame] from the [View] menu, and
place a checkmark in the menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete
The print guide / baic frame i no longer diplayed.
Show Measurement ScaleToggle the diplay of the on-creen meaurement cale on and off.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [show Meaurement scale] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark
in the menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete
The meaurement cale i diplayed on-creen.
To change print guide / baic frame etting, double click the [Print Guide and Baic
Frame] icon, then open the [Print Guide and Baic Frame] tab in the [Propertie]
Palette.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 362/415
Manga Studio
362
Show GuideCreate grid line on-creen, and toggle their diplay on and off.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
4. Display adjustment is complete
The guide line are created when you click the meaurement cale.
When no [Guide Layer] i preent a new layer i created.
You can drag the guide line to move them.
2. Show the Measurement Scale
select [show Meaurement scale] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark
in the menu to diplay the meaurement cale.
Show GridToggle the diplay of the on-creen meaurement grid on and off.
1. Open the Page
Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Select the Command
select [Drawing Aid] from the [View] menu, elect [show Grid], and place
a checkmark in the menu.
3. Display adjustment is complete
The grid i diplayed on-creen.
To change the [Grid Line] configuration method, double click the [Grid Layer] icon,
then open the [Grid] tab in the [Propertie] palette.
Application
3. Select a Tool
select the [Object selector] tool from the [Tool] palette.
To change the diplay of all guideline created, elect [Drawing Aid] from the
[View] menu, then elect the {show Guide}.
To remove individual guideline, ue the "Object selector" tool, to drag the ruler.
Explanation
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 363/415
User Guide
363
C h a p t e r
12
D i s p l a y
s a n d Wi n d o w s
Manga Studio
Show Information03
You can change settings for story information, author information, and pagination.
Show Story and Author InfoToggle diplay of the tory and author information on and off. select [show story
and Author Info] from the [Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to
diplay thi information.
Show Page NumberToggle the diplay of the on-creen page number on and off. select [show Page
Number] from the [Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to diplaythi information.
Display PaginationToggle diplay of pagination on and off. select [show Pagination] from the
[Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to diplay thi information.
To Change story settingrmation / author information / page number / pagination
etting,
open the [story] tab from the [Edit] window, cloe the [Page] tab,
elect [Change story setting] from the [story] menu, and change the information
in the [story Info] dialog.
Application
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 364/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 365/415
Other
Chapter 13
In this chapter we will discuss how to use Materials, how to undo incorrect commands and actions to record work.
Step: 01 Material (For EX only) 374
Step: 02 Undoing command 378
O t h e r
Step: 02 Action (EX only) 380
C h a p t e r
13
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 366/415
Manga Studio
366
Manga Studio
Materials (For EX only)01
Manage rulers, balloons; character Materials, etc using the [Materials] palette.
Materials basicsHere we will introduce Material type and operation method.
For aving [Material] refer to『saving Material』( ⇒ P. 58).
・[Baic frame layer], [Guide layer], [Grid layer] and [sketch layer] cannot be aved
to the [Material] palette.
・It i poible to ave data created in another application. When you double click
on the aved data, the application ued to create it will tartup.
Explanation
Operation method: Using MaterialsDrag and drop Material from the [Material] palette& onto the page.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
2. Drag &drop
From the [Window] menu, elect [Material], and drag & drop from the
[Material] palette [Material] → [Uer] folder onto the page.
3. Complete use
The new layer ha been created and the Material have been pated onto the page.
・ When you drag& drop an importable image file onto the page, the import
function or 2DLT function (EX only) will automatically tartup.
・ For non-importable file, the aociated application will tartup after double
clicking.
Explanation
Concept
Frequently ued Material in comic production can be called up anytime if aved to
the [Material] palette.
The Material which can be managed in the [Material] palette are a follow:
The location where you can ave Material in the [Material] palette are a follow:
・[Material] → [Uer] folder
PageFrame plit
Layer
Balloon ruler Material
Ruler Material
Character Material
3D Material
Image
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 367/415
User Guide
367
C h a p t e r
13
O t h e r
Operation method: Search Materials
You can earch Material aved in the [Material] palette.
1. Open the palette
select [Material] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Material] palette.
3. Select the commandWhen you elect [search] from the [Material] palette [show Menu] the
[search] dialog will be diplayed.
1 set the [Name] etc earch condition. Here we will enter「Takigawa-an」.
2 Click the [OK] button.
2. Select folder
select the folder to be earched.
4. Search is complete
search ha completed. Item will be diplayed in the earch reult folder.
1
2
External browsing
select a nominated folder, uch a My Document, etc, diplay in the [Material]
pallete and pate the image on to the page. You can diplay data which wa
created in another application.
[select Material] palette → [Menu diplay] → [Browe external folder...] to import.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 368/415
Manga Studio
368
Here we will introduce the concept operation method of character Material.
For aving character Material refer to『saving Material』( ⇒ P. 58).
Concept
Material where it i poible to ave layer and tone a a folder in character unit.
[Character Material]
[Tone Material]
Operation method: Using character Materials
From the aved [Character Material], pate Material a required onto the page.
1. Open the Page
Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.
From the [Window] menu, elect [Material] and the [Material] palette will bediplayed.
1 From [Material] → [Uer] → [Character Material], elect [HangryPopGirl] →
[Takigawa an] and double click.
1
2 With [Pate Thi Material], the entire character Material will be pated onto
the page.
3 With [Pate layer], a dialog will be diplayed and the elected layer will be
pated to the page.
4 With [Pate tone], a dialog will be diplayed and the elected tone Material
will be pated to the page.
[The [Propertie] dialog will be diplayed.
2
3
4
Character basics (EX only)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 369/415
User Guide
369
C h a p t e r
13
O t h e r
2. Paste is complete
The Material ha been pated to the page.
[Pate Thi Material]
[Pate layer]
[Pate tone]
[Pate tone] ignore the area when you aved it and pate the tone a i, before
proceing, onto the page.
Note
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 370/415
Manga Studio
370
Manga Studio
Undoing commands02
A function to allow you to undo wrong commands and redo deleted commands.
Undoing commands (Undo)Undo a command.
2. Select the command
select [Undo] through the [Edit] menu.
You can et up to 50 command which can be undone. Go to [File] menu
[Preference] → [Page] → [Undo] [No. of undo']
Application
1. Wrong command
During work, an extra line wa drawn.
3. Undo will occurThe command will be undone and the extra line will be deleted.
Redo command (Redo)Redo a deleted command to return to original condition.
2. Select the command
select [Redo] through the [Edit] menu.
1. Redo the delete
Thi i a page where an extra line wa deleted during work.
3. Redo will occurRedo will occur, the extra line will be retored.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 371/415
User Guide
371
C h a p t e r
13
O t h e r
History functionUing the hitory function, you can return to a previouly performed operation.
1. Select the command
select [Hitory] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Hitory] palette.
2. Undo
Undo procee to the point of the elected command.
1
1 select the proce to be undone from the command diplayed in the [Hitory pallete].
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 372/415
Manga Studio
372
Manga Studio
Actions (EX only)03
A function where you record a series of commands, then by replaying them, repeat the same process on multiple images.
Actions basicsHere we will introduce the action function concept and operation method.
Concept
Action i a function which allow you to record a erie of operation to your
computer and allow you to work more efficiently.
The action function ha the following baic concept.
・[Actions set]
Ued to claify action, create from「Action」.
・[Action]
The mallet unit of action which can be recorded. Created from [Command].
「Record」will occur in the action unit.
By clicking「Add」an「Action」(item) will be created in the「Action et」
and the「Command」will be aved in「Record」「Action」(item).
・[Command]
Refer to the recorded「Command」.
Written text will remain a i.
From the recorded command, elect [White Outline on Black 0.5mm].
A white outline will appear on written text.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 373/415
User Guide
373
C h a p t e r
13
O t h e r
Operation method 1: Record actions
Create an action et and record action.
1. Open the palette
select [Action] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Action] palette.
2. Select the menu command
select [New set] from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay].
3. Create action set
An action et will be created in the [Action] palette.
4. Record actions
Perform the action you want to record then record in an [Action et].
Perform the action you want to record.
Click the [stop recording action] button.
6. Action recording is complete
The operation have been recorded in the [Action] palette.
To delete an action, elect the command of the action you want to delete, and then
from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay] elect [Delete action].
Application
1 When the dialog [New set] i diplayed, et the [setting Name] and hortcut.
2 Click the [OK] button.
1
2
2
1 The newly created [New action et] will be diplayed.
2 Click the [Add action] button.
1
1 The newly created [Action 1] will be diplayed.
2 Click the [start recording action] button.
1
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 374/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 375/415
User Guide
375
C h a p t e r
13
O t h e r
Note that depending on the command it may not be poible to record the et value
for ome menu command.
Note
Commands which cannot be recorded
The following command cannot be recorded in the action function.
[File] → [Mot Recently Ued File]
[File] → [Import] → [select TWAIN device]
[File] → [Import] → [Continuou scan]
[File] → [Page etting]
[File] → [Print etting]
[File] → [Preference]
[File] → [shortcut etting]
[File] → [Cutom tool etting]
[File] → [Intall Material]
[File] → [Quit]
[Edit] → [Undo]
[Edit] → [Redo]
All from [View], [Window] and [Help] menu
When you elect [Action etting] from the [Action] palette → [Menu diplay],
the [Action etting] dialog will be diplayed.
・[Waiting time]
set the time to wait before executing a command.
・[Carry Out Continuous Check Of Loop Play]
When loop playback i et, every t ime the action playback ha completed
a continuation confirmation dialog will be diplayed.
[How to read the Action settings] dialog
Operation method 4: Insert menu
save a menu bar command directly to an action et.
select [Inert menu] from the [Action] palette → [Menu diplay] to inert.
1. Select the action
In the [Action] palette, elect the [Action] that you want to ave into the[Action et] palette.
4. Insert menu is complete
A new [Command] ha been aved to the [Action] palette.
2. Select the menu command
When you elect [Inert menu] from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay], the
[Inert menu] dialog will be diplayed.
3. Select target menu
select the menu command you want to ave from the menu bar. select the
[New Layer].
The [New layer] will be aved to the [Inert menu] dialog.
Click [OK] when aving i complete.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 376/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 377/415
Features Reference
Chapter 14
This chapter is a reference for Manga Studio's menus, toolbars and windows, and contains a list of keyboard shortcut commands.
Step: 01 Menu 386
Step: 02 Window & Palette 398
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 378/415
Manga Studio
378
Manga Studio
Menus01
This chapter explains all the features available in Manga Studio's menus.
Thi menu i motly ued for file input and output operation.
・[Revert...]
Revert the content of the current file to the mot
recently aved tate.
・[Save As Template...]
save the Page setting of the current [Page] File a
a Page Template.
・[Save Material] (EX only)
save the currently elected [Page], [Page] Layout, or
layer content on the [Material] Palette.
・[Import]
→ [3D File...] (EX only)
Import 3D File into a [Page].
→ [Image File...]
Import an image file into a [Page] a a layer.
→ [2DLT...] (EX only)
Import an image file into a [Page] and perform
2DLT rendering.
→ [Photoshop File...]
(EX only)
Import a Photohop File into a [Page] a a layer.
・[New]
Create a new [story] File or [Page] File for editing.
・[Open...]
Open a previouly aved [story] File or [Page] File
for editing.
・[Most Recently Used Files]
show a lit of recently ued [story] File and [Page]
File. select a file to begin editing.
・[Close]
Cloe the currently open editing window.
・[Save]
save the content of the [Page] File you're editing
to dik.
・[Save All]
save the content of all opened [Page] File to dik.
・[Save As...]
save the content of the [Page] File you're editing
to dik with a new name.
・[Save Story As...]
save the content of the [story] File you're editing
to dik with a new name.
File Menu
→ [TWAIN...]
Import an image from a TWAIN device into a [Page]
a a layer.
→ [Continuous Scan...] (EX only)
scan multiple page into a [story].
→ [Select TWAIN Device...]
select a TWAIN device to ue.
→ [Page File...]
Import a page file into the current [story].
→ [Layer File...]
Import a layer file into the current [Page].
→ [Multiple Layer Files...]
Import all layer file contained in the folder you
chooe into the current [Page].
→ [Text File...] (EX only)
Import a text file into the current [Page] a a new
text layer.
・[Export]
→ [Image File (In Pixels)...]
Export a [Page] into one of a number of image file
format by chooing a pixel ize.
→ [Image File (Dimensions)...]
Export a [Page] into one of a number of image file
format by chooing it Dimenion.
→ [Export Print Shop Data...]
Export a [story] in a data format uitable for
ending to a print hop.
→ [Text File...] (EX only)
Export the text from all a [Page]' text layer into a
text file.
・[Page Settings...]
set the Page size, orientation, etc. for printing.
・[Print Settings...]
set the print range, number of copie, and other
option.
・[Print...]
Print the current [story] or [Page] according to the
print etting.
1 1
2 2
3
3
4
5
4
5
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 379/415
User Guide
379
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Ue thi to intall a material pack. Exit Manga studio.
・[Quit]
Exit Manga studio.
・[Preferences...]
Chooe tory and page behavior, printing and
tablet etting, and other preference.
・[Shortcut Settings...]
(EX only)
Edit hortcut etting.
・[Custom Tool Settings...]
(EX only)
Edit etting for the [Cutom Tool] Palette.
・[Install Material...]
Thi menu i mainly ued for image editing operation.
・[Paste White As Transparent]
Editing[Page]Pate the content aved to the
clipboard to the new (page), making the white
area tranparent.
・[Paste Colors As Opaque]
Editing[Page]Pate the content aved to the
clipboard to the new (page), making the color
denity opaque.
・[Clear]
Delete the content included in the elected area of
the elected layer.
・[Clear Outside Selection]
Delete the content included in the area that ha not
been elected of the elected layer.
・[Fill Selection...]Paint the pecified color and etting within the
elected area.
・[Undo Fill]
[Page]Delete operation immediately prior to thi
(page).
・[Redo][Page]Redo the operation that deleted the (page).
・[Cut]
Cut the elected area, and ave to the clipboard.
・[Copy]
Copy the elected area, and ave to the clipboard.
・[Copying to Another Application]
Copy the elected area, and ave to the clipboard
to be pated to another application.
・[Paste]Editing [Page] Pate the content aved to the
clipboard to the new (page) a a new layer.
Edit Menu
・ [Fill Selection With Foreground Color](EX only)
Paint the currently-elected drawing color on the
target layer within the elected area.
・[Outline Selection]
(EX only)
specifie and draw the color and thickne of
the olid line around the elected area.
・[Change Line Color to Drawing Color]
(EX only)
Change the color of the drawing line on
the vector layer and the part that are nottranparent within the elected area to the
currently-elected drawing color.
・[Move and Transform]
→ [Scale…]・[Rotate…]・[Free
Transform…]・[Distort…]・[Perspective…]
・[Flip Horizontal]・[Flip Vertical]
Grap and drag the handle to tranform the
image in the elected area.
→ [Mesh Transform…](EX only)
Divide the image uing a grille to enable each
part to be tranformed eparately.
・[Tone Distort](EX only)
→ [Peripheral Distort…]・[Clear]・[Blur
Distort…]・[Scale…]・[Rotate…]・[Free
Transform…]・[Distort…]・[Perspective…]
・ [Flip Horizontal]・[Flip Vertical]・[Mesh
Transform…]
Ditort and tranform tone within the elected
area. Grap and drag the handle to ditort the
image a neceary.
・[Save Pattern To Tone Material]
save image within the elected area to the
[Material] palette a pattern tone.
・[Save Pattern To Dialog Balloon Material]
1
1
2
2
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 380/415
Manga Studio
380
Thi menu contain action for the [story] Tab of the [Edit] Window.
・[Insert New Page]
Inert a new page after the page elected in the
[Page Lit].
・[Select Paper and Insert...]
select the [Page Form], number of page, and
whether to inert the page before or after the
page elected in the [Page Lit].
・[Spread Pages] (EX only)
Concatenate adjacent page elected on the [Page
Lit] to make a page pread.
・[Single Pages] (EX only)
Detach concatenated page elected on the [Page
Lit] to make ingle page.
・[View]
→ [Page List]
Toggle to how or hide the [Page Lit].
→ [Fit View Scale to View Width]
Automatically cale the [Page Lit] to fit the view
width.
・[Open Page]
Open the elected page from the [Page Lit] in the
[Page Edit Area] of the current [Edit] Window.
・[Open Page in New Window]
Open the elected page from the [Page Lit] in a
new [Edit] Window.
・[Close Page]
Cloe the current page.
・[Next Page]
Go to the next page.
・[Previous Page]
Go to the previou page.
・[Clear Page]
Clear the content from the page elected in the
[Page Lit] and reet it to it initial tate.
・[Delete Page]
Delete the page elected in the [Page Lit] from the
tory.
Story Menu
→ [Page Info]
Toggle to how or hide the [Page Info] in the [Edit]
Window.
→ [Print Guide/Basic Frame]
Toggle to how or hide the [Print Guide & Baic
Frame] in the [Page Lit].
→ [Quick View]
set the tory view tate in the [Page Lit] to Quick View.
→ [High Quality View]
set the number of page in the tory, and check the
cover page and pagination in the [Page Lit].
・[Change Story Settings...]
Change story setting in the [story] File, uch a
the Title and author’ name.
・[Binding Position/ Start Page Changing]Change the binding poition and tart page
poition of your [story].
・[Change Page Format Guide (All Pages)...]
Change the paper guide etting for all page in
your [story].
・ [Change Page Format Guide (Selective
Page)...]
Change the paper guide etting for the elected
[Page].
・[Edit Memo...]Add a memo for the elected [Page].
・[Story Editor...] (EX only)
Open the [story Editor] to edit all the text ued in
your [story].
1 1
(EX only)
save image within the elected area or elected
ruler to the [Material] palette a word balloon.
・[Save Pattern To Character Material]
(EX only)
save image within the elected area to
[Material] a character.
・[Save Pattern To Brush Material…]
(EX only)
save the image within the elected area a
pattern bruhe.
[Join Print Guides] (EX only)
Matche left and right print guide on the pread page.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 381/415
User Guide
381
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Thi menu i ued for adjuting the page diplay and other etting.
View Menu
・[Rotate/Invert]
→ [Normal View], [Rotate 90 Degrees],
[Rotate 180 Degrees], [Rotate 270 Degrees],
[Flip Horizontal], [Flip Vertical]
Rotate or flip the view of the page image.
・[Vector View] (EX only)
→ [Show Anti-aliasing]
smooth out line in a [Vector Layer] with anti-
aliaing.
→ [Show Center Line]
show thin line along the center of line in a
[Vector Layer].
・[Show Page Rulers]
Toggle to how or hide the meaurement cale.
・[Show Panel Folder Area]
Toggle to how or hide [Frame] area gridline.
・[Show Text Layer Area]
Toggle to how or hide [Text Layer] area gridline.
・[Show 3D Workspace Area] (EX only)
Toggle to how or hide [3D Workpace] area gridline.
・[Show Story/Author Info]
Toggle to how or hide the story Info and Author Info.
・[Show Page Number]
Toggle to how or hide page number.
・[Show Pagination]
Toggle to how or hide pagination.
・[Show Transparent Area]
Toggle to how or hide tranparent area in the image.
・[Show Page Image in Panel Window]
Toggle to how or hide the page image in the panel
area of the [Panel] Window.
・[Show Entire Page Image in Panel Window]
Toggle to how or hide the entire page image in
the [Panel] Window.
・[Drawing Aids]
→ [Print Guide/Basic Frame]
Toggle to how or hide the Print Guide and baic
frame.
→ [Show Guide]
Toggle to how or hide guide line.
→ [Show Grid]
Toggle to how or hide the grid.
・[Snap]
Toggle napping.
・[Set Snap Point]
→ [Rulers], [Perspective] (EX only), [Speed
Lines] (EX only), [Parallel Lines] (EX only),
[Concentric Circle] (EX only), [Radial Curves]
(EX only), [Symmetry Ruler] (E X only),
[Guides], [Grids]
set what kind of ruler, grid or guide to nap to.
・[Show Page Rulers Manipulator]
Toggle to how or hide the ruler manipulator.
・[Show Page Rulers Handles]
Toggle to how or hide ruler handle.
・[Show Selection Launcher]
Toggle to how or hide the election launcher.
・[Show Selection] (EX only)
Toggle to how or hide the dotted line around
election.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 382/415
Manga Studio
382
・[Use Quick Select] (EX only)
Toggle the ue of [Quick select]. During [Quick
select], the selection Layer of the diplay tatu i
automatically treated a the selection.
・[Convert Selection To Panel Folder]
(EX only)
Convert the election to a [Panel Ruler Layer].
・[Vector Selection Method] (EX only)
→ [Cut In Selection]
When handling the drawing line for the [Vector
Layer], the drawing line are cut at the election
and then elected...
→ [Select Enclosed and Touching Lines]
When taking a election of the drawing line of the
[Vector Layer], the drawing line that are encloed
in or touch the election are elected.
→ [Select Enclosed Lines Only]
When taking a election of the drawing line
of the [Vector Layer], the drawing line that are
completely encloed in the election are elected.
Thi menu i ued for operation on election area and elected data.
Selection Menu
specifie a color on [Page], and the portion with
the ame color are elected.
・[Convert Selection To Layer]
Convert the current election to a [selection
Layer].
・[Change Layer Type To Selection]
Convert the [selection Layer] to the election.
・[Add Layer To Selection]
Convert the [selection Layer] to a elected area
and add it to the current election.
・[Subtract Layer From Selection]
Convert the [selection Layer] to a elected area
and delete it from the current election.
・[Use Quick Mask](EX only)
Toggle the ue of [Quick Mak]. During [Quick
Mak], the election can be temporarily created a
if drawn by uing the Drawing Tool.
・[Select All]
select the entire page during [Page] edit, and
elect the entire panel during [Panel] window edit.
・[Clear Selection]
Clear the current election.
・[Reselect](EX only)
Retore the cleared election to it tatu before
being cleared.
・[Invert Selection]
Invert elected and unelected region.
・[Expand Selection...]
specifie the numerical value and method to
expand the election.
・[Reduce Selection...]
specifie the numerical value and method to reduce
the election.
・[Blur Border...](EX only)
Blur the border of the election.
・[Select Color Range(Z)...]
1
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 383/415
User Guide
383
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Perform layer operation.
・[New Layer…]
set the layer type and detail, and create a new
layer.
・[Duplicate Layer]
Duplicate the elected layer.
・[Delete Layer]
Delete the elected layer.
・[Group Layer Into Folder]
Create layer folder, and ave the elected layer
in the folder.
・[Ungroup Layers]
Remove the layer tored in the elected [Layer
folder], [Text folder], and [Panel Folder], and delete
the folder.・・
・[Open Panel Folder]
Open the elected [Panel Folder] in a eparate
window.
・[Show Panel]
Diplay the panel frame of the elected [Panel
Folder].
・[Hide Panel]
Hide the panel frame of the elected [Panel
Folder].
・[Change Layer Type]
Change the type of the elected layer. Enable
Panel Folder to be created to Frame ruler.
・[Rasterize Layer]
Convert the elected layer into a rater layer.
・[Merge Layers…]
Merge multiple elected layer into a ingle layer.
・[Merge With Lower Layers]
Merge the elected layer and one layer down into
a ingle layer.
・[Make Upper Layer Edit Target]
(EX only)
Change the layer to be edited to one layer above.
・[Make Lower Layer Edit Target]
(EX only)
Change the layer to be edited to one layer below.
Layers Menu
・[Show Layer Color]
Change whether or not to replace and diplay the
image in the elected layer with the replacement
color et uing the [Propertie] palette. []
・[Lock Layer]
Turn ON and OFF whether or not to temporarily
diable change for the majority of propertie in the
elected layer.
・[Layer Properties]
Diplay the [Propertie] palette and the layer tab
for the elected layer.
・[Layer Settings]
Diplay the [Propertie] palette for the elected
layer, and diplay the pecial etting tab for that
layer.
・[Tone Display Settingss]
→ [Auto Set]
Change all tone diplay method to [Auto].
→ [Halftone Dot View]
Change all tone diplay method to [Tone].
→ [Grayscale View]
Change all tone diplay method to [Gray].
→ [Show Paste Area]
Add all color to the area to which the tone ha
been pated, and diplay.
→ [Hide Paste Area]
Hide if the area to which the tone ha been pated
i diplayed in color.
1
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 384/415
Manga Studio
384
Perform etting and operation related to Ruler.
・[Verticalize]
Make the ide of the ruler elected with the
[Ruler selection] tool vertical.
・[Horizontalize]
Make the ide of the ruler elected with the
[Ruler selection] tool horizontal.
・[Split Panel Ruler]
split the Panel ruler elected with the [Ruler
selection] tool into equal interval.
・[Expand Panel Ruler]
Expand and cut the Panel ruler elected with
the [Ruler selection] tool to the page edge in any
direction.
・[Merge Two Panel Rulers]
Merge the two elected Panel ruler.
・[Cut Rulers]
Cut the ruler elected with the [Ruler selection]
tool, and copie them to the clipboard.
・[Copy Rulers]
Copie the ruler elected with the [Ruler selection]
tool to the clipboard.
・[Paste Rulers]
Pate the ruler copied to the clipboard.
・[Delete Selected Points]
Delete the point of the ruler elected with the
[Ruler selection] tool.
・[Change Angle Status of Selected Points]
(EX only)
Change whether the tart and end point of path ruler
elected with the [Ruler selection] tool are corner.
Ruler Menu
・[New Special Ruler](EX only)
→ [New Pe r spec t i v e R u l e r ( 1 - p o i n t
Perspective)]・ [New Perspective Ruler
(2-point Perspective)]・ [New Perspective
Ruler (3-point Perspective)](EX only)
Create a perpective ruler in the layer being edited.
→ [New Radial Lines Ruler] (EX only)
Create a speed Line ruler in the layer being
edited.
→ [New Radial Curves Ruler]
(EX only)
Create a Radial curve ruler in the layer being
edited.
→ [New Parallel Lines Ruler] (EX only)
Create a parallel line ruler in the layer being edited.
→ [New Concentric Circle Ruler] (EX only)
Create a concentric Circle ruler in the layer being
edited.
・[New Symmetry Ruler](EX only)
→ [Line Symmetry]・ [2-axis Symmetry]・
[2-point Symmetry]・[3-point Symmetry]・
[4-point Symmetry]・[5-point Symmetry]・
[6-point Symmetry]・[8-point Symmetry]・
[12-point Symmetry]
Create a point-ymmetry ymmetry ruler in the
layer being edited.
1
2
2
1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 385/415
User Guide
385
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Thi menu i ued for adjuting and tranforming image.
Filter Menu
・[Render]
Thee filter ([Vanihing Point...], [Focu Line...],
[speed Line...], [Cloud Pattern] (EX only),
[Lightning...] (EX only)) are ued for generating
image.
・[Transform] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Polar Coordinate...], [Wave...],
[Waveform...] (EX only), [spiral...], [Zigzag...]) are
ued to tranform an image.
・[Image Adjustments] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Brightne/Contrat...], [Tone
Curve...], [Adjut Level...], [Hue/saturation/Value...],
[Bitmap...]) are ued to adjut an image.
・[Line Adjust] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Dut Cleaner...], [Edit Line...], [Change
Width]) are ued to adjut line in an image.
・[Effects] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Moaic...], [sharpen], [sharpen
(Heavy)], [Poterization...], [Invert Tone]) are ued
to add effect to an image.
・[Blur] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Blur], [Blur (Heavy)], [Gauian
Blur...], [Radial Blur...], [Motion Blur...]) are
ued to add effect to an image.
・[2DLT...] (EX only)
Thi filter i ued to perform 2DLT proceing
on an image.
・[Computones] (EX only)
Thee filter ([Tone...] are ued to pate
Computone material into an image.
・[Distort] (EX only)
Thee filter ([sparkle...], [soft Focu...],
[Pattern...], [Random Grid Pattern...], [Rain...])
are ued to generate image.
・[Drawing] (EX only)
Thee filter ([2D Rotate...], [Pinch...], [speed
Rotate...], [Ditorted Focu Line...], [Ditorted
speed Line...], [spherical...], [Fiheye Len...])
are ued to tranform your image.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 386/415
Manga Studio
386
Perform operation related to window and palette.
・[History]
Toggle to how or hide the [Hitory] Palette.
・[Color]
Toggle to how or hide the [Color] Palette.
・[Custom Tools] (EX only)
Toggle to how or hide the [Cutom Tool] Palette.
・[Actions] (EX only)
Toggle to how or hide the [Action] Palette.
・[Cascade]
Arrange the [Edit] Window o they cacade.
・ [Horizontal]Arrange the [Edit] Window a horizontal tile.
・[Vertical]
Arrange the [Edit] Window a vertical tile.
・[New Window]
Open a new [Edit] Window like the one currently
being edited.
・[Full screen Mode] (EX only)
Enlarge to current [Edit] Window to fill the entire
creen.
・[Arrange Palette]
→ [Arrange]
Return all palette poition to a tate aved with
"save Current Poition."
→ [Initialize Position]
Reet all palette to their initial poition.
→ [Save Current Positions]
save the current poition of all palette.
・[Zoom In]
Enlarge the view of the current [Edit] Window.
・[Zoom Out]
shrink the view of the current [Edit] Window.
・[Actual Pixels]
Make each pixel of the current [Page] image equal
one pixel on your creen.
・[Fit To Window]
Reize the current [Page] to fit it content in the
current edit area.
・[Print Size]
Reize the current [Page] to match the print ize et
in your preference.
・[Show All Palettes]
Toggle to how or hide the current [Palette].
・[Beginner's Assistant]
Toggle to how or hide the [Beginner' Aitant].
・[Tool Bar]
Toggle to how or hide the [Tool Bar].
・[Status Bar]
Toggle to how or hide the [statu Bar].
・[Tools]
Toggle to how or hide the [Tool] Palette.
・[Tool Options]
Toggle to how or hide the [Tool Option] Palette.
・[Layers]
Toggle to how or hide the [Layer] Palette.
・[Navigator]
Toggle to how or hide the [Navigator] Palette.
・[Materials]Toggle to how or hide the [Material] Palette.
・[Properties]
Toggle to how or hide the [Propertie] Palette.
Window Menu
1 1
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 387/415
User Guide
387
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Diplay the help and verion information.
・[Register Online....]
・[Check for Updates]
・[Documentation]
・[Manga Studio Product Page]
・[Manga Studio Online Resources]
Open Mangastudio.net in your brower.
・[Buy Manga Content]
・[Dynamic Help]
Diplay and hide Dynamic Help.
・[Version Information…]
Diplay the verion information.
Help Menu
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 388/415
Manga Studio
388
Edit Window
[Edit] Window [Story] Tab
Diplayed when the [story] tab in the [story] file i opened.
[Edit] Window [Page] Tab
Diplayed when the [Page] tab in the [story] file and [Page] file i opened.
Panel Window
Diplayed by double-clicking the panel folder in the [Page] file.
Diplayed when the [story] file and [Page] file are opened.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 389/415
User Guide
389
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
[Edit] Window, [Story] Tab Toolbar
Thi toolbar i on the [story] Tab in the [Edit] Window.
A Zoom InB Zoom OutC
scaleD scroll (croll the [Page Lit] on the [story] Tab in the [Edit] Window)E selectF show InfoG show Menu
A B C D E GF
[Edit] Window, [Page] Tab Toolbar
Thi toolbar i on the [Page] Tab in the [Edit] Window.
A Zoom InB Zoom OutC scaleD Fit To WindowE Actual PixelF Print size
G Rotate by specified AngelH AngleI Retore ViewJ Flip Horizontal
K Flip VerticalL show Page RulerM show Tranparent AreaN show Page Ruler ManipulatorO show Page Ruler HandleP show selection Launcher
Q show Page Image in Panel WindowR show Entire Page Image in Panel WindowS Change Page Image OpacityT snap
U snap to RulerV snap to Perpective RulerW snap to Radial Line RulerX snap to Radial Curve RulerY snap to Parallel Line RulerZ snap to Concentric Circle Ruler
a snap to symmetry Rulerb snap to Guidec snap to Gridd show Menu
A B C D E F G H I KJ L M N PO
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d
select [Tool Bar] from the [Window] menu to diplay or hide the tool bar.
Tool Bar
Main Window Tool Bar
Thi i the tool bar for the main window, which i diplayed when "Manga studio" i tarted.
A B C D E F G H I KJ L
M N O P Q R S T U V
A New Create/PageB New story/storyC OpenD saveE save AllF CutG CopyH Pate
I ClearJ UndoK RedoL PrintM Tool (Diplay Palette)N Tool Option (Diplay Palette)O Layer (Diplay Palette)P Navigator (Diplay Palette)
Q Material (Diplay Palette)R Propertie (Diplay Palette)S Hitory (Diplay Palette)T Color (Diplay Palette)U Cutom Tool (Diplay Palette)V Action (Diplay Palette)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 390/415
Manga Studio
390
Diplay when [Tool] i elected in the [Window] menu.
The command are laid out a button.
Tools Palette
A [select Rectangle] ToolB [select Ellipe] ToolC [select Lao] ToolD [select Polyline] ToolE [Magic Marker Wand] ToolF [Object selector] ToolG [select Layer] ToolH [Eyedropper] Tool (EX only)I [Panel Ruler Cutter] ToolJ [Create Frame] ToolK [Move Layer] ToolL [3D Frame] Tool (EX only)M [stamp] Tool (EX only)
N [Pen] ToolO [Pencil] ToolP [Magic Marker] ToolQ [Eraer] Tool
R [Bruh Pen] Tool (EX only)S [Pattern Bruh] ToolT [Fill] ToolU [Cloe Fill] Tool (EX only)V [Gradation] Tool (EX only)W [Text] ToolX [Line] ToolY [Curve] ToolZ [Polyline] Toola [Create Path] Tool (EX only)b [Rectangle] Toolc [Ellipe] Toold [Polygon] Tool
e [Line Level] Tool (EX only)f [Ditort] Tool (EX only)g [Blur] Tool (EX only)h [Edit Line] Tool (EX only)
i [speed Line] Tool (EX only) j [Change Width] Tool (EX only)k [Dut Filter] Tool (EX only)l [Join Line] Tool
m [stamp] Tool (EX only)n [Color Blend] Tool (EX only)o [Dodge] Tool (EX only)p [Burn] Tool (EX only)q [Hand] Toolr [Rotate] Tools [Zoom] Toolt [Black Darkne]u [White Darkne]
v [Tranparent]w Drawing Color: Tone] (EX only)
e
f
A
B
a
Z
Y
X
k
j
l
r
q
I
J
Manga Studio
Windows Palette02
This section introduces the Manga Studio window and palette functions.
T
P
N
E
I
G
S
W
s
Q
O
F
K
t u v
J
(For Debut)
m
n
p
o
i
h
g
d
b
c
C
D
P
R
V
N
L
T
E
G
t
s
Q
S
W
O
M
U
F
K
H
u v
w
(For EX)
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 391/415
User Guide
391
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Diplay when [Tool Option] i elected in the [Window] menu.
Enable the advanced [Tool] function to be et. You can toggle between [show Menu], [show Tab], [show Lit], and [show stroke]. The [show Lit] and [show stroke] tool
might not be diplayed.
Tools Options Palette
Enable the advanced [Tool] function to be et.
The item in the [Tool Option] palette depend on the tool. For detail, refer to the page for each tool.
[show Tab]
[show Lit]
[show stroke]
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 392/415
Manga Studio
392
H [New Image Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Image Layer].
I [New Selection Layer] ButtonCreate a new [selection Layer].
J [New Ruler Layer] Button
Create a new [Ruler Layer].
K [New Guide Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Guide Layer].
L [Show/Hide Layer]Click to toggle whether the layer i viible or
hidden. When the Eye icon appear, the layer'
image are viible.
M [Enable/Disable Layer Drawing]When the pen icon i viible, drawing i enabled in
the layer.
If you click on another layer of the ame typewhile one i already elected, a checkmark will
appear. You can manipulate the originally elected
layer and the clicked layer at the ame time in the
[Layer] Palette.
If another kind of layer i already elected, clicking
on the layer will elect it and how the pen icon.
N [Layer] IconsEach type of layer i repreented by a different icon.
Click the icon to elect and how the layer.
Double-click to open the [Propertie] Palette.
O [Layer Name] Field Click to elect and how the layer. The field will be
hown in a violet color when the layer i elected.
Double-click to change the name of the layer.
P [Convert Selection to Layer] ButtonConvert a election to a [selection Layer].
Q [Change Layer Type to Selection] ButtonImport a election area aved in a [selection Layer]
and create a new election.
R [Use/Cancel Quick Mask] Button
When enabled, you can change the election ina layer by editing it with drawing tool.
S [Use/Cancel Quick Select] ButtonWhen enabled, you can read a election on
multiple [selection Layer] at once.
T New Layer MenuClick the [Category] field on the [Layer] Palette to
how the New Layer Menu.
U Show Layer Properties Iconshow the [Propertie] Palette.
When the [Page] Tab of an [Edit] Window i open, elect [Layer] from the [Window] Menu to open the Layer Palette. You can manage the layer in your image.
Layers Palette
FDC GE
P R SQ
A B
L
O
N
H
M
J
K
I
A [Color View] ButtonWhen clicked on, the layer' [Diplay Color] i et
to [Color] Mode. The replacement color et in the
[Propertie] Palette for [Black] and [White] become
active.
B [Opacity]
Adjut the opacity for image in the currentlyelected layer.
C [New Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Image Layer].
D [New Layer Folder] ButtonCreate a new [Layer Folder].
E [Delete Layer] ButtonDelete the currently elected layer.
F [Lock/Unlock Layer] Button
Toggle whether the layer may be edited.
G [Show Menu] Buttonshow the [Layer] Menu.
T
U
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 393/415
User Guide
393
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
Diplay when [Navigator] i elected in the [Window] menu.
Diplay all or ome of the page a thumbnail. The page poition move when the page inide the palette i dragged.
Navigator Palette
E [Angle]Rotate and diplay the image at the pecified angle.
F [Information Display] ButtonDiplay the ize and poition information detail
numerically. H ~ O Diplay and hide the field.
G [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the [Navigator] menu.
H [X] AxisDiplay the X axi of the curor whoe tarting
point i the top left of the image.
I [Y] Axis
Diplay the Y axi of the curor whoe tartingpoint i the top left of the image.
J [H]Diplay the length along the X axi of the elected area.
K [V]Diplay the length along the Y axi of the elected area.
L [L]Diplay the length of the line to the oppoing
corner within the elected area.
M [R] (Red)Diplay the R (red) of the curor poition
numerically.
N [G] (Green)Diplay the g (Green) of the curor poition
Numerically.
O [B] (Blue)Diplay the B (blue) of the curor poition
numerically.
P [To Left Page]Open the next page when a tory i open.
Q [To Right Page]Open the previou page when a tory i open.
BA
H
I
J
GF
LK
EC D
M
O
N
A [Zoom In] ButtonEnlarge the image.
B [Zoom Out] ButtonReduce the image.
To change the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out]
cale, elect the [File] menu, and then elect
[Preference], [Page], [scale and Angle], and
[Diplay Magnification].
C [Scale]Diplay the image uing the pecified cale.
D [Rotate Specified Angle]
Rotate and diplay the image according to the etvalue whenever thi option i clicked.
To change the rotation angle, elect the [File]
menu, and then elect [Preference], [Page], [scale
and Angle], and [step Value].
P Q
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 394/415
Manga Studio
394
Diplay when [Material] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage tone, word balloon, and ruler, etc.
Materials Palette
L [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the [Material] menu.
M [Move Up] ButtonMove to the folder one level above.
N [Move Down] ButtonMove to the folder one level below.
O [Zoom In] ButtonEnlarge the preview diplay.
P [Zoom Out] ButtonReduce the preview diplay.
Q [Scale]
Change the ize of the preview diplay uing eitherthe lider or by entering a numerical value.
R [Folder Selection Menu]select the folder.
A FEB DC
NM
LKJIHG
QPO
A [Paste Materials] Button
Pate the material elected uing the [Material]palette to the elected area or [Page] tab in the
[Edit] window.
B [Replace Tone] ButtonReplace the elected tone in the elected area or
the [Page] tab in the [Edit] window with the tone
elected uing the [Tone] palette.
C [New Tone] Button[Diplay the [Propertie] palette and create a new
tone. You can create tone in the individual [Uer]
folder only in the [Material] palette.
D [New Folder] ButtonYou can create new folder. You can create
folder in the individual [Uer] folder only in the
[Material] palette.
E [Save Materials]You can save external file a material.
F [Delete]
You can delete the tone or folder. You can createfolder in the individual [Uer] folder only in the
[Material] palette.
G [Change Settings…]Diplay the [Propertie] palette, o you can change
the material etting.
H [Add to Favorites]Add the elected material to Favorite.
I Pull-Down MenuYou can elect to diplay the material table a
[small], [Large], [Detail], and [Lit].
J [Switch Tree View]Diplay and hide the t ree diplay.
K [Switch Preview]Diplay and hide the Preview diplay.
R
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 395/415
User Guide
395
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
select [Hitory] on the [Window] Menu to open the Hitory Palette. Thi record and manage the action hitory.
History Palette
A [Undo] ButtonRevert to a tate before the lat action.
B [Redo] ButtonRevert to a tate before the lat Undo action.
C [Show Menu] ButtonUe thi to elect [Undo] and [Redo] operation
from the [Hitory] Palette.
D [Action History]show the action hitory. Recent action are hown
at the bottom.
BA C
D
select [Propertie] on the [Window] Menu to open the Propertie Palette.
Properties Palette
A [Layer Type]show the layer type.
B [Layer Name]You can change the name of the layer here.
C [Color Model]show the currently et color model.
D [Resolution]show the currently et reolution.
E [Opacity]Adjut the layer' opacity.
F [Display Color]
Toggle the layer' diplay mode between[Graycale] and [Color].
G [Alternate Color of Black]When [Diplay Color] i et to [Color], thi et the
[Black] replacement color.
H [Alternate Color of White]When [Diplay Color] i et to [Color], thi et the
[White] replacement color.
I [Palette Color]You can et the layer diplay color on the [Layer]
Palette here.
J [Tone Area]Here you can et an alternative drawing color for
the [Tone Area] when the [Color Replacement
Method] in a [Tone Layer] or a [Graycale (8bit)]
[Rater Layer] i et to [Convert to Tone].
K [Opacity]Here you can et the opacity for the alternative
drawing color for the [Tone Area] when the [Diplay
Color] i et to [Color].
L [Output Attribute]Here you can chooe the [Output Attribute], either
[sketch] or [Finih].
M [Sub-Ruler]Here you can elect whether to show (Convert to Layer)
or Hide a [sub-Ruler Layer] that belong to a layer.
N [Color Reduction Method]Here you can elect the [Color Reduction Method]
from [Do Not Reduce Color], [Threhold], [Dither] or
[Convert to Tone].
O [Threshold]set the [Threhold] value when [Color Reduction
Method] i et to [Threhold].
P [Simple View] ButtonHide detailed etting.
Q [Detailed View] Buttonshow detailed etting.
R [Lock Layer] Button
Toggle the layer between locked and unlocked.
※ [selection], [Material] and [Ruler] Tab
Click on the tab to how the correponding etting.
[Simple View]
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
D
I
J
L
M
N
O
P
K
[Advanced View]
AB
C
DJ
M
Q
R
R
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 396/415
Manga Studio
396
Diplay when [Color] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage the drawing color.
G [Save Color] Button (EX only)[Pick up the current [Drawing Color] in the [Tool]
palette, and ave it to the current [Color set] in
the [Color] palette.
H [Add Color] Button (EX only)Create a new [Color] palette.
I [Delete Color] (EX only)[Delete the elected color from the current [Color
set] in the [Color] palette.
J [Show Menu] Button (EX only)Diplay the color et command menu.
K [Color] Palette (EX only)
Diplay the uable color.
L [Transparent Color Concentration]You can adjut the opacity of the tranparent
color uing either the bar or number.
M [Show Menu] Buttonselect and diplay the color command menu in
the gray, RGB, and HsV lider or area.
Color Palette
I
BA
JH
DCE
F
ML
G
A [Drawing Color: Black][]Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:
Black] in the [Tool] palette.
B [Drawing Color: White][Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:
White] in the [Tool] palette.
C [Drawing Color: Transparent][Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:
Tranparent] in the [Tool] palette.
D [Drawing Color: Tone] (EX only)[Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:
Tone] in the [Tool] palette.
E [Show Menu] Button (EX only)[show Tab]・[switche [Lit]
F [Color Set [Show Color Set] Menu (EX only)switche the color et etting.
Diplay when [Action] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage the action.
Action Palette (EX only)
C [Start Playing Actions]Play or top the action.
D [Delete Action]Delete the elected action.
E [Add Action]Create a new action etting.
F [Show Menu][Action]Diplay the [Action] menu.
G [Implementation Switch Check]Turn ON and OFF the command implementation.
H [Settings Switch Check]Turn ON and OFF the dialog box diplay.
(Only command diplayed in the etting dialog box.)
I [Show Advanced Action Settings]switche the action etting diplay between
develop and ave.
J [Action Layer]Diplay the action a a layer.
A FEB DC
HG
A [Switch Set] Menuswitche the color action etting.
B [Start Recording Actions]
Record action or top action. save to electedaction et.
Diplay when [Cutom Tool] i elected in the [Window] menu. Cutomize the tool.
Customize Tools Palette (EX only)
A [Custom Tools Settings] Buttonswitche the cutom tool etting.
A B
B [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the command menu.
K
[EX]
BA C
[Debut]
ML
I
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 397/415
User Guide
397
C h a p t e r
14
F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e
It i diplayed by electing [Beginner' Aitant] from the [Window] menu.
It i a palette directed at beginner with the tool divided by each work proce uch a [Pen In] or [Tone].
Beginner's Assistant
C
E
A
B
D
K
L
G
F
I
J
A [Layer List]
Diplay the uable layer.
B [Work Selection] tab
Can elect from among the [sketch], [Frame], [Draw], [Tone], and [Character]
tab.
C Tool set
Diplay the tool that can be ued for operation.
D [Tool Properties] display
Diplay the bruh etting of the elected tool.
E [Tool Type] display
Can change the advanced type of tool.
Change the tool ize.
F [Stroke-in] check button
Enable the [stroke-in] etting.
G [Stroke-out] check button
Enable the [stroke-out] etting.
H [Drawing Color]
[Drawing Color] i diplayed.
I [Selection Color]
The elected [Drawing Color] i diplayed.
J [Color Settings] tab
Can elect from [Color set] and [Color Detail] tab.
K [Color] palette
The uable color are diplayed.
M [Set Color] area
Can et the color from [Baic Color] palette.
N [Keyword] button
Material can be looked up through keyword.
N
H
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 398/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 399/415
Chapter 15
This chapter is a supplement on troubleshooting, as well as computer and manga terminology.
Step: 01 Troubleshooting 408
Step: 02 Glossary 411
C h
a p t e r
15
A p p e n d i x
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 400/415
Manga Studio
400
Manga Studio
Troubleshooting01
If there seems to be a problem, check the troubleshooting guide below before contacting the User Support Center.
Symptom Cause Countermeasure
Manga Studio does not start.
The correct operating environment may not be in
place.
In order for Manga Studio to work properly, it
is necessary that the OS version, CPU, memory
capacity and the likes of the PC being used satisfy
the operating environment.
Check the specifications of the PC in use, and if the
operating environment is not satisfied, consider
adding parts or taking such other actions.
During the installation of the application, the
administrator or system administrator may not have
logged on...
When installing the application, log in as
administrator or system administrator.
Problems may arise in Manga Studio itself or the
setup due to some system issues.
Double-click the Manga Studio icon while holding
down the [Shift] key to do an initialization startup.When the [Start up and clear the default settings?]
dialog is displayed, clicking the [Yes] button displays
the [Initialization on Startup] dialog, and then, click
the [OK] button with the [Others] check box turned
on.
Manga Studio freezes immediately.
Reinstalling Manga Studio does not fix it...
The correct operating environment may not be in
place.
Check the specifications of the PC in use, and if the
operating environment is not satisfied, consider
adding parts or taking such other actions.
Software, other than those provided as standard in
the OS, may include those that are incompatible with
Manga Studio.
Revert the PC being used to the settings during
shipping, and check whether the issue arises.
Each time Manga Studio is aborted, the remaining
hard disk capacity becomes small.
Manga Studio saves the in-process data. Normally,
this data is automatically deleted upon exit but is
not deleted if normal exit is not possible, and it takes
up hard disk space.
[From the [File] menu, check [Preferences] →
[Memory] → [Virtual Memory Folder Location].
If the file "SWP*.tmp" remains in the system's
temporary folder (e.g. C: \) of the selected drive on
the disk used by virtual memory, manually delete this
file. Note: The file deletion should only be done after
ending Manga Studio.
The story data cannot be stored onto disk.Sufficient free space is not maintained on the hard
disk.
Maintain at least 500 MB of free space on the hard
disk.
Image file cannot be imported.There are image file formats that cannot be imported
by Manga Studio.
Use an image editing software to change the format
of the image file to one that can be imported by
Manga studio.
Even if [Import]→ [TWAIN...] is selected from the
[File] menu, it is not possible to read from scanner.
[TWAIN...] cannot be selected without opening
[Page] of the [Edit] window.
Select [New...] → [Page...] from the [File] menu,
then select [TWAIN...] after opening [Page] tab from
the [Edit] window..
The scanner's power supply may be off, or it is not
properly connected.
Check whether the scanner is properly connected.
Depending on the type of scanner used, it may not
be recognized by the PC if the scanner's power is not
turned on before switching on the PC.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 401/415
User Guide
401
C h a p t e r
15
A p p e n d i x
Symptom Cause Countermeasure
Cannot draw to page.
The layer is not selected correctly.Select the layer for drawing.
Depending on the layer, drawing may be disallowed.
[White] or [Transparent] drawing color is not
displayed.
Check the drawing color. If [White] drawing is to be
checked, select [Show Transparent Areas].
The layer's opacity setting is low.
Double-click the layer icon of the [Layers] palette,
and display the [Layers] tab of the [Properties]
palette. (In the case of [Simple View], click the
[Advanced View] button to expand the palette)
Set the [Opacity] to 100%.
The drawing color's opacity setting is low.Select [Color] from the [Window] menu, display the
[Color] palette, and set [Opacity] to 100%.
The selection is on the screen.
Drawing outside the selection is not possible.Clear the selection.
If there are extreme differences between the
drawing's resolution and the size of the displayed
area, they are not reflected on screen.
Do the drawing after the screen is zoomed in byusing the [Zoom] tool.
Non-supported tablet is used. Check the operating environment.
The [Tool Settings] menu on the [Tool Options]
palette of the drawing tool cannot be selected.
The initialization file may not have been properly
imported.
Double-click the Manga Studio icon while holding
down the [Shift] key to do an initialization startup.
When the [Start up and clear the default settings?]
dialog is displayed, clicking the [Yes] button displays
the [Initialization on Startup] dialog, and then, click
the [OK] button with the [Tools] check box turned on.
When tablet is used, the drawing spot is shifted from
that of the mouse cursor.
Depending on the tablet settings, the drawing tool
for pen pressure sensing may cause the drawing to
be shifted.
Check the current [Coordinates Detection Mode]
at the control panels tablet settings. If it is [Mouse
Mode] (Relative Coordinates), change it to [Pen
Mode] (Absolute Coordinates).
When the resolution is changed while working, the
tablet's drawing point may not be correctly obtained.
After uninstalling the driver of the tablet in use
and then restarting the PC, switch the display's
resolution to that of Manga Studio's working
resolution and then reinstall the tablet driver.
When the tablet is used, the cursor cannot be
moved until the edge of screen.The settings of [Mapping] may not be correct.
Adjust the settings of [Mapping] in accordance withthe user manual that comes with the tablet. Check
whether the tablet settings of Windows' [Control
Panel] are recognized correctly.
The selection does not go well by using the
([Rectangle Selection], [Ellipse Selection], [Lasso
Selection], [Polygon Selection]) selection tools.
It is possible that other than [Normal Selection] is
selected at the [Shrink] tab settings of the [Tool
Options] palette.
Select [Tool Options] from the [Window] menu,
and let the settings at the [Shrink] tab be [Normal
Selection].
Tone settings cannot be changed.
Tones that have a key displayed on the icon are
provided as the default for Manga Studio, and
cannot be edited or deleted.
Either paste the tone to a layer, or copy to the tone
folder under the user folder.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 402/415
Manga Studio
402
Symptom Cause Countermeasure
Moire occurs at printing and tone areas.
The pasting of tones overlaps and moire also occurs
on screen?
When tones are shifted and pasted with overlap, the
patterns combine and moire occurs.
Moire that occurs at data stage is reflected as it is to
printouts.
Check whether the pasting method for tones fits
with production design.
For correction of tone overlap, select the [Move
Layer] tool and select [Move Tone] at the [Tone
Operations] of the [Tool Options] palette. Moire
can be avoided by shifting the tone position while
checking the angle, lines, and density.
Moire may occur due to the effects of the automatic
adjustment function and printer proprietary setup.
After checking the printer's user manual, redo the
printer setup.
If the [Tone Layer] is rasterized, there is a high
probability of moire occurrence due to loss of vector
format.
Rasterized tone cannot go back to original [Tone
Layer].
Tones should be kept as they are without
rasterization as far as possible.
Faintly expressed areas underwent changes on
printing due to [Gaussian Blur].
Expression that employs gray density is drawn
by [Black and White (2-bit)]. It is expressed by an
assembly of small points of 1 dot on the monitor,
but it may not be recognized by printers with low-
resolution output.
Select the layer, then select [Change Layer Type] from
the [Layers] menu and a dialog is displayed.
Select [Type]: [Raster Layer]/Color Model]: [Gray
(8-bit)]/ [Color Reduction Method]: [Convert to Tone].Select [Blur] or [Blur More] from the [Filter] menu
and execute.
A red Panel Ruler is displayed to text .The text uses a font that is not available on the PC in
use, and the use of an alternative font is indicated.
Check the font used in [Properties] palette of
corresponding text layer from the [Layers] palette,
then check the text font shown in red Panel Ruler,
and either install on the computer in use or change
the corresponding text font to that of a font already
installed on the PC in use.
Troubleshooting information can also be found at the location below.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 403/415
User Guide
403
C h a p t e r
15
A p p e n d i x
Manga Studio
Glossary02
(PC Terminology)CMYK
Pronounced as "see-wahy-em-key." It is a color model used in printing
expressed by the colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Dpi
Pronounced as "dee-pee-ahy." Abbreviation for dots per inch.
It determines the quality of screen display and printout. It indicates the
resolution of pictures and characters. The higher the number, the finer and
more beautiful the display can be.
For manga, generally monochrome : 600 dpi, and color : 350 dpi.
FTPPronounced as "ef-tee-pee." Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol.
It is a type of communications method used when transferring files.
FTP passive mode
One of the FTP data transfer modes.
The client side (own PC) sends a connection to server and transfers the file(s).
Lpi
Pronounced as "el-pee-ahy." Abbreviation for lines per inch.
It determines the printing quality. It indicates the resolution of pictures and
characters. The higher the number, the finer and more beautiful the display can be.
Commercial printing is generally 100~175 lpi.
OS
The basic software that controls the entire computer system.
RGB
Pronounced as "ahr-jee-bee." It is a color model for screen display used by
monitor and scanner, and it is expressed by red, green and blue.
TWAIN
Pronounced as "tweyn."
It is a general-purpose input method for image input devices such as scanner
and digital camera. If TWAIN is supported, the software can directly importimages from the scanner.
Application
Application software that works on top of the OS to achieve the user's
objective.
Uninstall
Deletes the software and reverts to the conditions prior to installation.
Install
Copies to PC and sets to ready-to-use conditions.
Cursor(pointer)
Mark that indicates the position for user input on the screen.
Resolution
A term that indicates the granularity of the image. A larger value means the
image granularity can be expressed more finely.
Gradation
It indicates the change in color gradation in numerical value.
Extension
In Windows file name, the character string of 3~4 characters that indicates the
file type is the rightmost portion separated by '.'(period). Double-clicking the
file with the extension starts up a corresponding application that opens the
file. The creator in Macintosh has similar roles, and the extension is also found
in Macintosh nowadays in order to have file compatibility.
Cut
It deletes the contents of the selected area from the window and paste to
clipboard.
Clipboard
The place where the copied or cut contents are stored temporarily.
Grayscale
The expression format of image data with intermediate tones expressed by
black and white.
Diffusion
A type of dither in which gray is expressed by dot density.
It is a conversion method that assigns density errors to surrounding pixels.
Copy
Reproduction. The [Copy] command, compared to [Cut] and [Paste], pastes the
contents of the selected area from the window to the clipboard. The original
content that is copied remains on screen.
Threshold
A gradation value that is the reference when converting a gray image to the 2
values of black and white.
As it gives rise to reaction, it is a necessary environmental value.
Lines
A term that indicates the granularity of printing. A larger value means the
printing granularity can be expressed more finely.
Dialog 1 inch 1 inch
dpi lpi
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 404/415
Manga Studio
404
A window in conversation format for carrying out installation or respective
setups.
Directory
A visualized hierarchical structure. The [Root Directory] is the highest hierarchy
in the hierarchical structure.
Dither
Falsely expressing gray at a fine cluster of black.
Default
The initialization settings of the software.
Dot
A square dot that is the smallest unit forming a digital image. It does not
include color or color depth. It may be referred to simply as a "dot".
Driver
The software that acts as an intermediary when connecting to hardware.
Paste
Pasting the content of the clipboard to the window that is currently in use.
Pixel
A square dot that is the smallest unit forming a digital image. It does not
include color or color depth.
File
A collection of program or data.
Folder
A place where files are assembled, grouped, and organized.
Freeze
Abnormality occurred in the system, and the screen is not working any more.
Vector image
Also called drawing image. It is an image shape expressed by point
coordinates and the joining line or the plane parameters. Even if the image is
transformed by zooming in and out, the image quality fitting the resolution is
maintained.
Multi-user OS
An OS that allows multiple users without mutual interference. For example,
Windows Vista or Mac OS X. The installation of applications can only be done
by users with system administrator privilege.
Monochrome binary tone
The expression format of image data without intermediate tones expressed by
black and white.
Utility
Software that supplements inadequate parts of OS or application.
Raster image
Also called bitmap image. An image format expressed by a collection of small
dots. It is not suitable for scaling and transform since zooming in causes
jaggedness (indentation) to be seen on the outline and zooming out causes
information to be lost.
Login/logout
For OS that can be used by multiple users, the input of user name and
password to open one's own desktop.
(Main Image Formats)
BMP
Pronounces as B-M-P. It refers to bitmap image.
This is the Windows standard image format. The resolution cannot be set. The
extension is BMP.
PICT
Pronounced as "pikt."
One of the standard image formats of Macintosh (Mac OS 9). It is seldom used
in recent times. The extension is PCT.
EPS
Pronounced as "ee-pee-es."
Image format that is widely used in the pasting of images for print DTP. It allows
fast editing by using low-resolution data on screen and allows high-capability
output by using high-resolution data when printing. The extension is EPS.
TIFF
Pronounced as "tif."
Image format that is widely used in the pasting of images for print DTP. The
extension is TIF.
TGA
Pronounced as "tee-jee-ey." Also called TARGA.
It is an image format for use in videos. It is possible to specify transparent area.
For the image compression method, it supports only lossless compression that
can completely restore the or iginal information. The resolution cannot be set.
Pronounced as "pee-dee-ef."
Document file format for compresses ion to make the file's data space small.
The extension is PDF.
PSDPronounced as "pee-es-dee."
Image format of Adobe Company's Photoshop graphics software that is
practically the global standard for design. It has layer functionality. The
extension is PSD.
GIF
Pronounced as "jee-ahy-ef."
Image format that is pervasive in internet use. It is suitable for flat image such
as animated picture. The extension is GIF.
JPG
Pronounced as "jey-pee-jee."
Image format that is pervasive in internet use. It is suitable for images that is fullof gradation such as a photo. Commonly used at 72 dpi. The extension is JPG.
PNG
Pronounced as "pee-en-jee."
The third image format for use in internet, it combines the merits of GIF and
JPG. It is possible to designate transparent area. For the image compression
method, it supports lossless compression that can completely restore the
original information. The extension is PNG.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 405/415
User Guide
405
C h a p t e r
15
A p p e n d i x
(Printing Terminology)
ICC profile
Pronounced as "ahy-see-see-proh-fahyl."
A file that is created based on the definitions of the International Color
Consortium so that colors are reproduced accurately on different devices.
It describes the area and reproduction properties of the respective colors that
are present.
PostScript font
An outline font that enables the printing or screen display of beautiful
characters without jaggedness even in large sizes. Due to its high price and
high resolution, it is mainly directed at and pervasive in commercial use. The
font is required in printers.
TrueType font
An outline font that enables the printing or screen display of beautiful
characters without jaggedness even in large sizes. Due to its low price and low
resolution, it is mainly directed at and pervasive in personal use. The font is not
required in printers.
*Manga Studio can use whichever of the TrueType font or PostScript font aslong as the usage environment is present on the computer.
Antigue-Gothic style
A general style common in commercial manga magazines that displays
Japanese katakana using the "Antigue style" and Japanese kanji using the
"Gothic style."
Gothic style
A style in which the lengthwise and breadth wise strokes that form the
characters are generally of uniform width.
Style
A character set in which the entire style is of unified design.
Tone jump
An appearance in which there is no continuity of gradation in the gradation
area of the image resulting in a boundary of striped pattern.
It is prone to happen in the event of scanner failure or extreme correction.
Font
Style set for computer use.
Meicho style
The start or end of the lines forming the characters is of stressed form so as to
allow for the pen's start of writing or end of writing,
Moire
A new pattern arising from the overlap of continuous patterns, and it is alsocalled interference fringe.
It occurs due to overlapped pasting of tones or shifting with resolution.
Rendering intent
A conversion method for maintaining the synchronization of two different
color spaces.There are 4 types, namely [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Relative colorimetric], and
[Absolute colorimetric].
(Manga Related)
Handwritten character
Not through sound imitation or movable printing, but the character is actually
written with ink(pen).
Main line
The pen’s stroke-in line.
Script
The words spoken by the characters.
White fill Bringing out the white at black-inking area of characters and pictures.
White edge
Bringing out white at edge of script or drawn characters.
Screen tone/ tone
The sheet where pattern is printed on cellophane. This is cut and pasted to the
manga's background.
Bleed
The image is drawn until the cutting position (juts out from the cutting line
until the bleed-marks line) of the book.
Head and tail bands/ gutter/ thumb edge
The top part of a manga is the head band while the bottom part is the tail
band. The gutter is in the binding direction while the thumb edge is in the
opposite direction of binding.
Binding
The opening direction of .
For normal Japanese manga with the script written vertically... [Right-hand
binding]
For western manga or numerals, and science-oriented manga with the scriptwritten horizontally...[Left-hand binding]
Cover page
The beginning page. Also called the title page.
Name
Meaning 1: A simple line drawn with pencil as guide prior to putting in the
pen. Meaning 2: The script inside a balloon.
Meaning 3: Decision on the flow of the entire story.
Pagination
Page number or Panel number.
Balloon A script-containing Panel Ruler when characters are talking.
Inking
Fill with black.
White
Whiten the error location or location to be effectively made white.
Spread
Assembling the 2 pages at left and right as one continuous layout (Panel).
Ruby
The Japanese furigana cast at Japanese kanji and the likes.
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 406/415
Manga Studio
406
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 407/415
User Guide
407
C h a p t e r
15
A p p e n d i x
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 408/415408
Alphanumeric
1 Line Panel...........................................................................................136
1 Point Perspective ................................................................................121
2DLT Rendering Folder ..........................................................................150
2DLT Rendering Function .....................................................................292
2DLT Settings .......................................................................................295
2D Rotate ..............................................................................................284
2 Point Perspective ................................................................................121
2 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 128
3D Frame Tool ......................................................................................304
3DLT Rendering Folder ..........................................................................150
3DLT Rendering Function .....................................................................322
3DLT Settings .......................................................................................324
3D Object Auto Adjust ..........................................................................308
3D Object Ground ................................................................................ 308
3D Object Move ................................................................................... 306
3D Object Reset ................................................................................... 309
3D Object Rotate .................................................................................. 307
3D Object Show/Hide ...........................................................................312
3D Object Size ......................................................................................307
3D Object Space ................................................................................... 306
3D Object Space Rulers ........................................................................316
3D Preview Layer .................................................................................. 150
3D Scene File ........................................................................................303
3D Selection Tool .................................................................................. 305
3D Sketch Figures ................................................................................. 318
3D Sketching ........................................................................................300
3D Sketching Function .........................................................................300
3D Workspace Folder ............................................................................ 150
3 Point Perspective ................................................................................121
3 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 128
4 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 128
5 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 129
6 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 129
8-bit Selection .......................................................................................169
8 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 129
A
Action Palette........................................................................................396
Actions .................................................................................................. 372
Action settings dialog ..........................................................................375
Active Display ......................................................................................313
Actual Pixels .........................................................................................358
Add Layer to Selection ..........................................................................189
Adjust by Anchor Point ..........................................................................119
Airbrush .................................................................................................. 91
Align Rulers...........................................................................................143
Anchor Point .........................................................................................137
B
balloon .................................................................................................. 405
Balloon material ..................................................................................... 59
Basic frame .......................................................................................... , 28
Beginner's Assistant .................................................................................. 8
Bezier Curve Ruler ................................................................................. 115
Biaxial Line Symmetry Ruler ..................................................................128
binding .................................................................................................. 405
bleed ..................................................................................................... 405
Blurring Tool ..........................................................................................243Blur the Border ......................................................................................182
BMP ...................................................................................................... 404
Border Selection .................................................................................... 177
Both-Sides Display ............................................................................... 315
Box ....................................................................................................... 313
Browse externally ................................................................................ 367
Brush Control ..........................................................................................81
Brush Control Dialog ............................................................................... 77
Brush material ........................................................................................61
Bug Glasses Tool ................................................................................... 356
C
Calligraphy Pen Tool ................................................................................ 88
Camera Operation ................................................................................ 310Camera Rotation .................................................................................. 311
Camera Selection ................................................................................. 310
Center Point(Perspective Ruler) .............................................................122
Change Brush Shape Menu ..................................................................... 92
Change Corner Status of Selected Points .............................................. 140
Change Layer Type ................................................................................158
Change Line Color to Drawing Color .................................................... 186
Change Pattern Brush Style ..................................................................... 91
Change title information ........................................................................38
Change Tool Option Settings] Dialog....................................................... 77
Changing the Layer Pallette Color .........................................................163
Changing the Order of Layers ............................................................... 162
Character material ......................................................................... 60, 368Classic style.............................................................................................14
Clear Area Outside Selection ......................................................... 186, 183
Clear Page .............................................................................................. 34
Clear (Selection) .................................................................................... 186
Clear Selection .............................................................................. 186, 182
clipboard ...............................................................................................403
Close Curve ...........................................................................................118
Close page .............................................................................................33
Close Path ............................................................................................... 95
Close Selected Ruler .............................................................................. 138
CMYK .................................................................................................... 403
Color Area Selection .............................................................................. 181
Color Mixing Tool .................................................................................. 246
Color Mode ...........................................................................................169
Color Palette ........................................................................................396
Color profile ............................................................................................16
Color Set ................................................................................................. 75
Color setting dialog ................................................................................ 53
Color Settings Dialog .............................................................................. 75
Compatibility ..........................................................................................23
Compatible 3D Data ............................................................................. 302
Concentric Circle Ruler ..........................................................................127
Continuous scan .................................................................................... 48
Control Pattern Materials Dialog ............................................................. 92
Control Point .........................................................................................137
Convert Layers to Folder ....................................................................... 157
Convert Layer to Selection .................................................................... 189
Convert Selection to Panel Folder.......................................................... 182
Copy ...................................................................................................... 226
Copy and Paste .....................................................................................186
Copy Rulers ...........................................................................................137
Copy to Another Application .................................................................227
Correction ............................................................................................... 80
cover page ............................................................................................405
cpg ..............................................................................................................
Create a closed curve. ........................................................................... 118
Create a continuous curve. .................................................................... 116
Create a Curve with a Corner ................................................................ 117
Create new dialog (set dimensions) .......................................................28
Create new → Page (Page template) .....................................................26
Create new → Page (Set dimensions) ....................................................26
Create new style dialog .......................................................................338
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 409/415409
Create new → Title (Page template) ......................................................24
Create new → Title (Set dimensions) ..................................................... 24
Create New Tone ................................................................................... 186
Create Path Tool .................................................................................... 116
cursor(pointer) ...................................................................................... 403
Cursor(Preferences) .................................................................................11
Curved Speed Lines Ruler ...................................................................... 125
D
default .................................................................................................. 404Delete Layer ..........................................................................................156
Delete Layer from Selection .................................................................. 189
Delete page ............................................................................................34
Delete Selected Points ........................................................................... 138
Delete Vector ...........................................................................................83
diffusion ................................................................................................ 403
directory ................................................................................................ 404
Display Adjustment .............................................................................. 312
Display Screen .......................................................................................354
Distance Between 3D Object and Camera ............................................310
Distort ................................................................................................... 237
Distortion Tool .......................................................................................239
Divide Page .............................................................................................64Dodging Tool .........................................................................................247
dot ........................................................................................................ 404
Drawing .................................................................................................. 65
Drawing Color: Black .............................................................................. 68
Drawing Color: Color............................................................................... 73
Drawing Color: Gray................................................................................ 70
Drawing Color: Transparent ..................................................................... 68
Drawing Color: White .............................................................................. 68
Drawing Format ...................................................................................... 66
E
Edit Color ................................................................................................ 75
Edit Menu ............................................................................................379
Edit Polygon Dialog ................................................................................. 77
Edit Window .........................................................................................388
Ellipse Selection Tool ............................................................................. 170
Ellipse Tool ............................................................................................102
Eraser Tool ............................................................................................... 82
Expand Panel Ruler ............................................................................... 142
Expand Selection ................................................................................... 186
Export ..................................................................................................... 50
extension ..............................................................................................403
F
file .........................................................................................................404
File Menu .............................................................................................378
Files ......................................................................................................... 21
Fill Selection ..........................................................................................183
Fill Selection in Drawing Color .............................................................. 184
Fill Tool .................................................................................................... 94
Filter Menu ...........................................................................................385
Filter settings .........................................................................................43
Filter settings tab ................................................................................... 45
Finish Attribute ......................................................................................147
Fisheye Lens .........................................................................................290
Flip Horizontal .......................................................................................238
Flip Horizontal ......................................................................................314
Flip Vertical ...........................................................................................238
Focus Line Layer ....................................................................................147
folder .................................................................................................... 404
Folder Path(Preferences) .........................................................................16
Four Views ............................................................................................327
freeze .................................................................................................... 404
G
grayscale ...............................................................................................403
Grid ...................................................................................................... 324
Grid Layer .............................................................................................152
H
handwritten character ........................................................................... 405
head and tail bands / gutter / thumb edge ............................................ 405
Header ................................................................................................... 28
Help Menu ...........................................................................................387
History function .................................................................................... 371
History Palette ......................................................................................395
Horizontal Grid ..................................................................................... 315
Horizontalize .........................................................................................143
How to read the story editor ................................................................ 342
I
IccProfile ........................................................................................... 16, 53
ICC profile .............................................................................................405
Image export dialog ............................................................................... 51
Image file (export) ................................................................................. 50
Image file (Import) ................................................................................ 42
Image Layer ..........................................................................................147
Import .................................................................................................... 40
Importing text ......................................................................................339
In.............................................................................................................80
Infinity ................................................................................................... 123
Initialize startup ........................................................................................9
inking .................................................................................................... 405
Inner dimensions .................................................................................... 28
Insert menu ..........................................................................................375
Insert new page ..................................................................................... 34
Inside Selection ..................................................................................... 176
install .................................................................................................... 403
Invert Screen .........................................................................................357
J
JPEG setting dialog ................................................................................ 53
L
Ley input ................................................................................................. 10
Lasso Selection Tool .............................................................................. 171
Layer ..................................................................................................... 145
Layer Division Display ........................................................................... 163
Layer file (Import) .................................................................................. 41
Layer Folder...........................................................................................150
Layer Menu ..........................................................................................383
Layer Move Tool .................................................................................... 154
Layer Pallette ........................................................................................162
Layer(Preferences) ................................................................................... 13
Layer (Save material) ............................................................................. 57
Layer Selection ......................................................................................155
Layer Selection Tool ............................................................................... 153
Layer settings .........................................................................................43
Layer settings tab ................................................................................... 45
Line Edit Tool .........................................................................................234
Line Joining Tool ....................................................................................230
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 410/415410
Line Lever Tool ......................................................................................232
Line Tool .................................................................................................. 98
Line Width Correction Tool ....................................................................233
M
Magic Marker Tool .................................................................................. 84
Magic Wand Tool ................................................................................... 173
Magnification Angle(Preferences) .......................................................... 12
main line ...............................................................................................405
Make single page ................................................................................... 36Masking Layer .......................................................................................149
Material ...............................................................................................366
Materials Palette .................................................................................. 394
Memory(Preferences) .............................................................................. 15
Memory saver mode .............................................................................. 14
Merge Down Layer ................................................................................ 161
Merge Layers ........................................................................................161
Merge Selected Vertex Point .................................................................139
Merge Two Panel Rulers ........................................................................143
Mesh Transform .................................................................................... 238
Mincho style.......................................................................................... 405
Modify paper guide ................................................................................ 39
moire.....................................................................................................405Move and Transform ............................................................................. 186
Move and Transform ............................................................................ 299
Multibrush .............................................................................................. 92
N
New Layer .............................................................................................155
O
OBJ ....................................................................................................... 302
Offset ..................................................................................................... 25
Offset width ...........................................................................................28
Open ...................................................................................................... 32
Open file ................................................................................................ 32
Open page .............................................................................................33
Operation with the 3D Manipulator .....................................................309
Options(Preferences) ............................................................................... 16
Outline Selection ................................................................................... 185
Outline Setting ..................................................................................... 296
P
Page Bleed ............................................................................................142
Page File ................................................................................................. 22
Page file (Import) ................................................................................... 40
Page information .................................................................................... 36
Page list ................................................................................................. 36
Page number ..........................................................................................29
Page(Preferences) ................................................................................... 10
Page (Save material) .............................................................................. 56
Page settings ..........................................................................................62
Page settings dialog ............................................................................... 63
Page template ........................................................................................24
Palm Tool ...............................................................................................354
Panel Creation Tool ............................................................................... 166
Panel Folder .................................................................................. 132, 135
Panel Ruler ............................................................................................131
Panel Ruler Cut Tool .............................................................................. 136
Panel Ruler Divisions .............................................................................141
Panel Ruler Layer .................................................................................. 132
Paper ......................................................................................................38
Paper size ............................................................................................... 28
Parallel Lines Ruler ................................................................................126
Parent/Child Relationship .....................................................................303
paste ..................................................................................................... 404
Paste ..................................................................................................... 228
Paste Color Opaque .............................................................................. 229
Paste Rulers........................................................................................... 137
Paste White Transparent ........................................................................228
Pattern Brush Tool ................................................................................... 90
PDF setting dialog .................................................................................. 53
Pencil Tool ............................................................................................... 86Pen Pressure ............................................................................................81
Pen's Gradient.........................................................................................81
Pen Tool................................................................................................... 78
Perspective ............................................................................................237
Perspective Operation (Camera) ........................................................... 311
Perspective Operation (Parent/Child Relationship) ............................... 319
Perspective Ruler ................................................................................... 121
Perspective Ruler .................................................................................. 317
pff ...........................................................................................................17
Photo Comic .........................................................................................132
Photoshop file (Import) .........................................................................46
Photoshop setting dialog .......................................................................53
pixel ...................................................................................................... 404Point(Units) .............................................................................................16
Polygon Tool ..........................................................................................102
Polyline Selection Tool ...........................................................................171
Polyline Tool ..........................................................................................100
Pose ..................................................................................................... 303
Pose Selection ...................................................................................... 319
Position adjustment tab .........................................................................44
Posterization ........................................................................................ 298
Preferences .............................................................................................10
Previous Filter ...................................................................................... 299
Q
Quick Mask ...........................................................................................191
Quick Select ..........................................................................................192
R
Raster detailed settings dialog ............................................................... 52
Raster Drawing ....................................................................................... 66
raster image ..........................................................................................404
Rasterize ...............................................................................................158
Raster Layer ..........................................................................................147
Raster Layer + (Panel Ruler) .................................................................. 131
Raster + (Panel Ruler) ...........................................................................134
Rectangle Selection Tool .......................................................................170
Rectangle Tool .......................................................................................102
Redo command .................................................................................... 370
Reduce Selection ........................................................................... 186, 180
Rendering intent ..................................................................................... 16
Rendering Settings ............................................................................... 295
resolution ..............................................................................................403
Reverse Layer ........................................................................................149
Ribbon .................................................................................................... 91
Rotate ................................................................................................... 237
Rotate Pen Axis ....................................................................................... 81
Rotate Screen ........................................................................................357
Rotation Axis ........................................................................................303
Rotation Tool .........................................................................................355
Rubi settings ........................................................................................333
Rubi settings dialog ............................................................................. 335
ruby ....................................................................................................... 405
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 411/415411
Ruler ..................................................................................................... 105
Ruler Handles ........................................................................................114
S
Save ....................................................................................................... 30
Save all .................................................................................................. 32
Save as compatible type ........................................................................30
Save copy ............................................................................................... 30
Save page template ............................................................................... 55
Save pattern as balloon material ........................................................... 59Save pattern as brush material .............................................................. 61
Save pattern as character material ......................................................... 60
Save pattern as tone material ................................................................ 57
Save title with different name ................................................................ 30
Save with different name .......................................................................31
Saving a Pose ....................................................................................... 321
Saving a Scene ..................................................................................... 321
Saving Motions (Series of Poses) ..........................................................320
Saving Poses/Scenes ............................................................................ 320
Scan ........................................................................................................ 47
Scanning (Preferences) .......................................................................... 14
screen tone / tone .................................................................................405
script ..................................................................................................... 405Select Again ..........................................................................................182
Select All ............................................................................................... 182
Select and insert page ............................................................................ 35
Select Enclosed Lines ............................................................................ 193
Selection ............................................................................................... 167
Selection Launcher ................................................................................ 186
Selection Layer ...................................................................................... 151
Selection Menu .................................................................................... 382
Shade ................................................................................................... 325
Sharpen Angle .........................................................................................79
Sharpen Selected Vertex Point ...............................................................139
SHD ...................................................................................................... 302
Shortcut settings .................................................................................... 18
Show All ................................................................................................ 358
Show Center Line .................................................................................... 67
Show Grid .............................................................................................362
Show Guide........................................................................................... 362
Show/Hide Layer ................................................................................... 162
Show Measurement Scale ..................................................................... 361
Show Menu ..........................................................................................381
Show Page Numbers ............................................................................. 363
Show Pagination ................................................................................... 363
Show Print Guide and Basic Frame ....................................................... 361
Show Story / Author Info ....................................................................... 363
Show Transparent Area .........................................................................359
Shrink Selection .................................................................................... 176
Shutdown.................................................................................................. 8
Single Color.............................................................................................73
Sketch Attribute .................................................................................... 147
Sketch layer ............................................................................................43
Sketch Layer ..........................................................................................148
Smooth ................................................................................................ 324
Snap ...................................................................................................... 109
Snap to.................................................................................................. 109
Special Ruler .........................................................................................121
Speed Line Layer ................................................................................... 147
Speed Lines Ruler .................................................................................. 124
Speed Lines Tool .................................................................................... 241
spread ................................................................................................... 405
Stamp......................................................................................................91
Stamping Tool ....................................................................................... 244
Standard Interface .................................................................................... 8
Standard resolution ................................................................................ 28
Startup ...................................................................................................... 8
STC ....................................................................................................... 302
Stitch position, change start page .......................................................... 38
Story editor ..........................................................................................341
Story Menu ..........................................................................................380
style ...................................................................................................... 405
Style ........................................................................................................ 91
Style settings ........................................................................................ 336
T
Tablet PC ................................................................................................. 15
Tablet(Preferences) .................................................................................. 15
Text dialog ...........................................................................................343
Text Folder.............................................................................................150
Text functions .......................................................................................330
Text Layer ..............................................................................................149
Text settings .........................................................................................332
Text tool ...............................................................................................330
Text units ................................................................................................ 16
Texture ................................................................................................. 324
Texture Display ..................................................................................... 314
Texture Mapping .................................................................................. 302TIFF setting dialog .................................................................................. 53
Title file .................................................................................................. 22
Title information dialog ..........................................................................29
Tone detailed settings dialog ................................................................. 52
tone jump.............................................................................................. 405
Tone Layer .............................................................................................149
Tone material .........................................................................................57
Tone Settings ........................................................................................299
To next page ..........................................................................................33
Tool Bar ................................................................................................ 389
Tool Options Palette ................................................................................ 76
Tool Palette .............................................................................................76
Tool(Preferences)..................................................................................... 14
Tool Settings Menu ................................................................................. 77
Tools Options Palette ...........................................................................391
Tools Palette .........................................................................................390
U
Undoing commands ............................................................................. 370
Undo Levels ............................................................................................11
uninstall ................................................................................................ 403
Unit ........................................................................................................ 28
Use character material .........................................................................368
User data folder ......................................................................................16
V
Vanishing Point Layer ............................................................................147
Vanishing Point(Perspective Ruler) ........................................................ 122
Vector Absorption ................................................................................... 79
Vector Drawing ....................................................................................... 66
vector image .........................................................................................404
Vector Layer ..........................................................................................148
Vector Layer Change Settings Dialog ....................................................159
Vertical Grid .........................................................................................315
Verticalize .............................................................................................143
Virtual memory ....................................................................................... 15
W
white ..................................................................................................... 405
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 412/415412
white edge ............................................................................................405
white fill ................................................................................................ 405
Window Menu ..................................................................................... 386
Wire Frame ...........................................................................................313
Word Balloon Layer ............................................................................... 149
Z
Zoom..................................................................................................... 237
Zoom Out ..............................................................................................237
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 413/415413
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 414/415
7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 415/415